Yamaha RX-V520RDS Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V520RDS

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

HTR-5450RDS

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-5450RDS

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

G B

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

HTR-5450RDS

Printed in Malaysia ID

V735940

00RX-HTR5450RDS-cv1/4 2/1/1, 4:42 PM1

CAUTION

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for

ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not place this unit where it may get exposed to

rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,

which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to

this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause

electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is

dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held

responsible for any damage resulting from use of this

unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/

or liquid drops inside this unit.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of

time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source

as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this

unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby

mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a

very small quantity of power.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an

appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed

as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN

must be connected to the terminal which is marked with

the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

0101V520RDS_caution_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM2

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

FEATURES .......................................................... 2

GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3

Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3

Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3

Battery Replacement .............................................. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4

Front Panel ............................................................. 4

Remote Control ...................................................... 6

Using the Remote Control ...................................... 7

Display ................................................................... 8

Rear Panel .............................................................. 9

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10

Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10

Speaker Placement ............................................... 10

CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11

Before Connecting Components ........................... 11

Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12

Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12

Connecting Video Components ............................ 14

Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19

Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19

Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19

BASIC OPERATION

PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21

Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23

Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24

Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect

speakers) ........................................................... 25

TUNING ............................................................. 26

Connecting the Antennas ..................................... 26

Automatic Tuning ................................................ 27

Manual Tuning ..................................................... 27

Automatic Preset Tuning

(for RDS stations only) .................................... 28

Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... 29

To Recall a Preset Station .................................... 29

Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. 30

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................ 31

Description of RDS Data ..................................... 31

Changing the RDS Mode ..................................... 31

PTY SEEK Function ............................................ 32

EON Function ...................................................... 33

RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 34

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ......................................................... 35

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 35

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 36

2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 37

3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 37

4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 38

5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 38

6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 38

7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 39

8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 39

9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 39

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS .......................................................... 40

Delay Time ........................................................... 40

Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear

and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 40

Adjusting Method ................................................ 41

SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 42

Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 42

Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 42

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 43

Component Selector Buttons ............................... 43

Controlling the Components Connected to

This Unit .......................................................... 43

Description of Each Mode ................................... 44

Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ 48

Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... 49

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 50

Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 50

CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 50

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 53

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 57

GLOSSARY ....................................................... 58

INDEX ................................................................ 60

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US

Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and

pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when

the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in

parentheses in this manual.

5-Channel Power Amplification

◆ Minimum RMS Output

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)

Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Center: 70 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Multi-mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ DTS Decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital Decoder

◆ Hi-Fi DSP

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or

DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing)

◆ Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future

Formats

◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections)

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks

◆ SLEEP Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

FEATURES

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM2

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check that the following items are included in your package.

Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

Battery Installation in the Remote

Control

1 Turn the remote control over and slide the

battery compartment cover in the direction of

the arrow.

2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type)

according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Close the battery compartment cover.

Battery Replacement

If the remote control operates only when it is close to the

unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with

new ones.

Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes.

If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for

the remote control will return to the factory settings.

Notes

• Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement.

• Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

• Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an

extended period of time.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

Quick reference card

Connection guide

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2/1/1, 2:24 PM3

SURROUND

DIGITAL

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

q w

fa g

6 EON

Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a

radio program of that type automatically.

7 PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

8 INPUT MODE

Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO,

DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more

types of signals to this unit.

9 VOLUME

Turn this control to turn up or down the volume.

0 6CH INPUT

Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT

takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h

(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set

this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on,

set the volume at the minimum level.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 Remote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control.

3 Display

This shows various information.

4 PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.

5 RDS MODE/FREQ

When an RDS station is received, press this button to

change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,

RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or frequency display mode in turn.

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM4

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

q BASS

Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the low-frequency response.

w TREBLE

Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right

main speakers.

e BALANCE

This control is only effective for the sound from the main

speakers.

Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume

from the right and left main speakers to compensate for

sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening

room conditions.

r SPEAKERS A/B

Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main

speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.

Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker

system that you don’t want to use.

t PROGRAM l / h

Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect

speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the

selected program appears on the display.

y EFFECT

Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center

and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS

audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the

right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels

of the right and left speakers may not match.

u PHONES jack

Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this

unit outputs audio signals for private listening.

When listening with headphones privately, set both

SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position.

i VIDEO AUX jacks

Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a

game console to these jacks. To reproduce source signals

from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

o PRESET/TUNING l / h

When “ z ” appears on the display:

This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8).

Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset

station number.

When “ z ” goes off from the display:

This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower

frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies.

When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button

to select a program type.

p A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A

to E).

a PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and

switch the function between for storing a broadcasting

station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also

used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with

each other.

s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold

down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin

automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only).

d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Press this button to switch the tuning mode between

automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method,

press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on

the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.

f FM/AM

Press this button to switch the reception band between FM

and AM.

g INPUT l / h

Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX,

MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that

you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected

input source appears on the display.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM5

Remote Control

1 Indicator

This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote

control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected

button again.

2 Component selector buttons

Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the

component you want to control with the remote control.

(The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to

“Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component

selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to

that component operation mode.

3 POWER

Each time you press this button, the unit switches between

the power on and standby mode.

4 TEST

Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker.

5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+

These buttons are used to select a preset station.

A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset

stations

PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)

6 MUTE

Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press

this button again.

7 VOLUME

These buttons are used to adjust the volume level.

u: To turn up the volume

d: To turn down the volume

8 SLEEP

Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.

9 –/+

These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and

TIME/LEVEL mode.

0 TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL

mode.

q Input selector buttons

These buttons select the input source.

CD: To play a CD

TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast

MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape

deck)

DVD: To play a DVD

D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV

VCR: To play a video cassette

AUX: To use another audio component

V-AUX: To use another audio/video component

w 6CH INPUT

Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

Press

AMP(TUNER).

This section describes basic operation of this unit with the

remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE

CONTROL” for full details.

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM6

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Using the Remote Control

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately 6 m

(20 feet)

e EFFECT

Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center

and rear).

r PRG+, PRG–

Press these buttons to select a DSP program.

Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for

selecting the SET MENU item.

t SET MENU

Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be

sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor

during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a

large object between the remote control and the sensor, the

sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to

receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight

or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe

light). In this case, change the direction of the light or

reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.

Notes

• Handle the remote control with care.

• Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or

bath;

– dusty places; or

– extremely low temperature.

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM7

Display

ENHANCED

PS PTY RT CT

MEMORY SLEEP

PCM

DSP

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

DOLBY DTS

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DISCO 5CH STEREO

MONO TV SPORTS

MOVIE THEATER 1 2

ENTERTAINMENT

GAME

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB PTY HOLD

NEWSINFOROCK CONCERT

BASS EXT.

AUTO

EON

STEREO

AFFAIRS SPORT

TUNED

6 7

1 t indicator

The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS

decoder is turned on.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.

3 g and o indicators

“ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital

decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are

encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when

the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.

4 DSP program indicators

This indicates the name of the selected DSP program.

5 PTY HOLD indicator

This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK

mode.

6 RDS mode indicators

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red

indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the

corresponding RDS mode is now selected.

7 EON indicator

This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data

service is being received.

8 AUTO indicator

This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning

mode.

9 STEREO indicator

This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient

signal strength is being received.

0 x indicator

“ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound

field processor is on.

q v indicator

This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse

code modulation) digital audio signals.

w Headphones indicator

This lights up when headphones are connected.

e Multi-information display

This display shows various information: for example the

name of the selected input source and the various settings

during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station

frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner

is selected as the input source.

r MEMORY indicator

This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY.

During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the

memory.

t Program type name indicators

The name of the selected program type lights up when the

“EON” indicator lights up.

y TUNED indicator

This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

u SLEEP indicator

This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2/2/1, 5:34 PM8

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Rear Panel

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

3 6CH INPUT jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

4 Antenna input terminals

See page 26 for connection information.

5 Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.

6 Speaker terminals

See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.

7 AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

As this terminal is used

for an examination in the

factory, do not connect

any equipment to this

terminal.

3 4

0 q

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

MAIN

+ –

R L

– +

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

–

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAINS

8 AC OUTLET(S)

Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video

components (see page 18).

9 Audio component jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

0 SUBWOOFER jack

See page 17 for connection information.

q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before

you change the setting of this switch (see page 18).

(Europe model)

0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM9

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality

with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers

and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers

(with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a

moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift

smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the

same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus

the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from

your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for

the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for

the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it

is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without

it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models and

have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers

do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise

sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-

performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full

range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective

not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all

channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency

effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a

source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA

Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for

natural and lively bass reproduction.

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main speaker (R)

Center speaker

Main

speaker (L)

Subwoofer

Rear speaker (L)

Rear speaker (R)

1.8 m

■ Main speakers

Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the

same.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing

slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face

of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the

monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

Note

• If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the

right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the

SET MENU is set to the NON position.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low

bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to

place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly

toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections.

CAUTION

Please use magnetically shielded speakers.

Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected

even when magnetically shielded speakers are used.

Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens.

PREPARATION

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM10

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

CONNECTIONS

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been

completed.

Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some

components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each

component to be connected to this unit.

When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect

it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc.

Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.

The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows:

Yellow video signals (composite)

White analog audio signals for the left channel

Red analog audio signals for the right channel

coaxial digital signals

After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.

V V

C C

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM11

■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD

recorder or tape deck

• When you connect your recording component to both the analog

and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the

digital signal.

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

• Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are

independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the

analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital

jack.

Connecting an External Decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and

right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an

external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items

of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except

“MAIN LVL”).

CONNECTIONS

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can

use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS

bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the

input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input

jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

• You can designate the input for each digital jack according to

your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU.

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before

you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not

discard the cap. When you are not using the

optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If

you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard,

this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has

coaxial digital output jack.

• When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital

jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM12

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

L R

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER

OUTPUT

MAIN

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

INPUT OUTPUTOUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

L R

MD recorder or

CD recorder

CD player

External decoder

(Europe model)

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates coaxial cables

CONNECTIONS

Audio component

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM13

Connecting Video Components

■ Audio signal jacks

Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.

■ Video signal jacks

Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.

■ TV monitor with a 21-pin connector

Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable.

■ S VIDEO jacks

If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video

jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks.

Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video

component to this unit’s composite video jacks.

Notes

• Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S

VIDEO connection.

• If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and

composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their

respective output jacks.

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

S VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO IN

S VIDEO OUT

DVD player

Video monitor

S Video signal

Signal flow

TV/digital TV,

cable TV or

satellite tuner

VCR

Game console

CONNECTIONS

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

These jacks are used to connect any video input source such

as a game console to this unit.

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 2/1/1, 2:23 PM14

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

DVD player

Video monitor

SCART-plug

No connection

TV/digital TV

or cable

TV/satellite tuner

VCR

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates video cables

indicates S-video cables

When using an LD player

Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.

If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks,

connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a

commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.

If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog

input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD

player.

Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for

the DVD/LD mode.

CONNECTIONS

(Europe model)

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM15

Connecting Speakers

Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no

sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural

and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage the unit and/or speakers.

■ Speaker cables

1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of

each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

■ Main speaker terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

■ Rear speaker terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ Center speaker terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

CONNECTIONS

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM16

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Subwoofer connection

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack.

Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off

frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation

instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using

this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.)

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL

(5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some

signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

SPEAKERS

MAIN

–

R L

–

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

–

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAINS

Main speakers A

Right

Left

Main speakers B

Right Left

(Europe model)

Center speaker Rear speakers

Right Left

Subwoofer

system

CONNECTIONS

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM17

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be

damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not

be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode.

Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only

when this unit is in the standby mode.

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAINS

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAINS

Switch

position

Speaker

Impedance level

Left

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Right

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you

will not use this unit for a long period of time.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS

U.K. model .......................................................... 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your

audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or

POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected

component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum

power (total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.

(Europe model)

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

(Europe model)

To AC outlet

SWITCHED

CONNECTIONS

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM18

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE

Using the Test Tone

The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should

be performed at your listening position with the remote

control.

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press TEST.

“TEST LEFT” appears on the display.

3 Turn up the volume.

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each

speaker for about two seconds in following order: left

main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right

rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes

as shown below.

Notes

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit

in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

• If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the

setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU.

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level

balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using

the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is

performed, the sound output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound field

processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital

decoder and DTS decoder.

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the

PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Start Adjusting

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Turn the power on.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you use two main speaker

systems, press both A and B.

4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the

center position.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

VOLUME

STANDBY

/ON

SPEAKERS

OFF

BASS BALANCE

– +

TREBLE

– +

2,6

TEST

LEFT

TEST

RIGHT

TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR.

TEST CENTER

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM19

4 Adjust BALANCE on the

front panel so that the

sound output level of the

right main speaker and the

left main speaker is the

same.

5 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the speaker currently

outputting the test tone so

that it becomes almost the

same as that of the main

speakers.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected

speaker.

6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST.

The test tone stops.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,

the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in

step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the

right and left main speakers.

• For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY

TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40.

• After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the

speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual

source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS” on page 40.

• Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust

the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME

(or VOLUME (u/d)).

• If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear

speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by

setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”.

Front panel

BALANCE

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE

0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM20

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on

the component selector.

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Turn the power on.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you use two main speaker

systems, press both A and B.

PLAYING A SOURCE

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFFON

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

1,6

4 Select the desired input source with INPUT

l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on

the video monitor for video sources.)

The name of the selected input source appears on the

display.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the

display.

Notes

• An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears.

Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”.

• If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT”

appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video

source and the sound from the audio source selected by using

“6CH INPUT”.

• The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and

Indications” on page 23 for details.

SPEAKERS

OFF

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

6CH INPUT

Front panel

Input source

BASIC OPERATION

STANDBY

/ON

Front panel Remote control

Remote control

INPUT

Front panel

0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM21

5 Play the source.

Refer to the instructions for the source component (and

“TUNING” for details).

Note

• When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD

player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press

one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/

LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to

control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.

These controls are only effective for the sound from the

main speakers.

• BASS controls the low-frequency response.

• TREBLE controls the high-frequency response.

• BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume

from the right and left main speakers.

7 Use the digital sound field processor.

Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”.

■ To mute the sound

Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output.

Press MUTE on the remote

control.

To restore the audio output to

the previous volume level, press

MUTE again.

Note

• During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display.

■ When you have finished using this

unit

Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this

unit in the standby mode.

PLAYING A SOURCE

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle

96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a

source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set

the player for digital output. Refer to the operation

instructions for the player.) Note the following when a

96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

1. The following indication will appear on the display.

2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output

as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and

right main speakers.

Note

• If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and

“BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to

BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer.

3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on

page 40 cannot be made (except the level of the

subwoofer).

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

(For example, you can listen to classical music while you

are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled

with the remote control.

Play a video source, and then select an audio source with

the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV

function does not work if you select the audio source with

INPUT l / h on the front panel.

PROGRAM

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

Front panel Remote control

BASS BALANCE

–

TREBLE

–

Front panel

PCM

0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM22

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Notes on playing a source

encoded with a DTS signal

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed

in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS

decoding even if you make a digital connection between

this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set

the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the

noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to

play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a

digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or

DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing

a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces

no sound.

• The following phenomena may occur if the input mode

is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with

DTS:

– If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS

signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-

decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated

during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator

lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash

immediately after playback of a source encoded with a

DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a

DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is

flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.)

If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the

input mode back to AUTO.

– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip

operation is performed. If this status continues for a

certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch

from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal

input mode and the “t” indicator will go out.

Input Modes and Indications

When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on

the component selector.

This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component

is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set

the priority of the input signal.

Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control) repeatedly

until the desired input mode is shown on the

display.

PLAYING A SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal

2) Digital (PCM) signal

3) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input

signal encoded with DTS is selected

even if another signal is input at the

same time.

ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input

signal is selected even if a digital

signal is input at the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is

selected.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,

the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and

reproduces 5.1 channel source.

• The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and

DVD players in the following situation:

When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is

performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback

is resumed.

• Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when

playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode

set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM23

Selecting a DSP Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for

details about each program.

• Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25).

■ On the remote control

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press PRG+ or PRG–

repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected

program appears for a moment

and the selected DSP program

indicator lights up on the

display.

PROGRAM

DSP

DIGITAL

MOVIE THEATER 1

BASS EXT.

PLAYING A SOURCE

DSP program name

■ On the front panel

Press PROGRAM l or h

repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected

program appears for a moment

and the selected DSP program

indicator lights up on the

display.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

PROGRAM /

DSP program name

• If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each

speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS” on page 40 for details.)

Notes

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in

your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected

when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is

set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the

appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard

from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be

heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the

SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output

from the main speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is

selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

DSP

DIGITAL

MOVIE THEATER 1

BASS EXT.

0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM24

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT

CINEMA

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field

effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using

YAMAHA original technology, natural surround

reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual

speaker.

The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET

MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by

using the main speakers.

Note

• This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY

DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT

CINEMA).

SILENT CINEMA

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of

the DSP program while using headphones. This feature

delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening

through the speakers.

You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your

headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers

are on.

EFFECT

Front panel

PLAYING A SOURCE

Canceling the Sound Effect (turning

off the effect speakers)

Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and

monitor only the main sound.

Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on.

Notes

• If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed

and output from the main speakers.

• If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not

output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back

on the sound effect.

Remote control

0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM25

TUNING

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

Antenna stand

Connecting a coaxial cable to the included

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model

only)

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Cover

Unit: mm

(inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve of

the 75-ohm coaxial cable

and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with

pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and

minimum interference, connect

the antenna GND terminal to a

good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT

75Ω UNBAL. terminal.

Note

• Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal

hole.

2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the

AM ANT and GND terminals.

3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.

Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.

5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best

reception is obtained.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer

or service center about the outdoor antennas.

0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM26

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TUNING

Automatic Tuning

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Use INPUT l / h to select

TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM

or AM).

“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

display.

If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band

indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a

lower frequency and h once to tune in to a

higher frequency.

Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop

at the desired station.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop

at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak).

• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and

the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. If an

RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the

station name is shown instead of the frequency on the display.

Manual Tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you

must tune in to it manually.

1 Use INPUT l / h to select

TUNER as input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM

or AM).

“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.

If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band

indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to

the desired station.

To continue the tuning search, hold down the button.

Note

• If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically

received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality.

Lights up

Turn “ z ” off

Goes off

Turn “ z ” off

0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM27

TUNING

Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS

stations only)

You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function

for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially

store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

display.

3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for

about 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

preset tuning begins from the frequency currently

displayed toward the higher frequencies.

Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ...

A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are

stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C,

D and E) in that order.

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which the unit will

store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after

pressing MEMORY in step 3),

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to

select the preset number with which the first station will

be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and

then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward

lower frequencies.

■ When automatic preset tuning is

completed

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset

Station” on page 29.

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM

station by simply using the manual preset tuning method.

• Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network

stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of

received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic

preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all

stations.

• Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by

automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in

signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store

it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a

case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be

received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because

this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification)

data along with the station.)

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.

If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,

the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again

by using preset tuning methods.

Lights up

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

213

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

AUTO

Flashes

0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM28

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TUNING

Manual Preset Tuning

You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations)

manually.

1 Tune in to the desired station.

Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning

procedure.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the

desired group (A to E) of preset stations

before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off.

Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The

selected group appears on the display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) with which you

want to store the station before the “MEMORY”

indicator goes off.

Press l to select a lower preset

station number and h to select

a higher preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the

“MEMORY” indicator goes off.

The displayed station has been stored as the preset

group and number you have selected, and the reception

band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator

lights up on the display.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.

To Recall a Preset Station

You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number with which it was stored.

You can also recall a preset station with the remote control.

Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press

TUNER on the input selector.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group

of preset stations.

Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET

–/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the display

along with the reception band, frequency, and the

“TUNED” indicator lights up.

PRESET/TUNING

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

AUTO

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

A/B/C/D/E

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

2,5

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

STEREO

TUNED

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

Flashes

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM29

TUNING

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other.

Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”

1 Recall preset station “E1”.

Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a

Preset Station” on page 29.

2 Hold down (PRESET/

TUNING) EDIT for about

3 second.

“E1” and the “MEMORY”

indicator flash.

3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons

on the front panel.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash.

4 Press (PRESET/TUNING)

EDIT again.

The display shows the

exchange of stations has been

completed.

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

– +

TREBLE

– +

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

2,4

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

MEMORY

BASS EXT.

MEMORY

Flashes

0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM30

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

Radio Data System (RDS) is a data transmission system by

FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system

transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the

normal radio signal.

RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program

Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program

Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced

Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out

among the network stations.

Description of RDS Data

This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data

when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.

■ PS (Program Service name) mode:

The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.

■ PTY (Program Type) mode:

The program type on the RDS station being received is

displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS

stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is

broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to “PTY

SEEK Function” for details.

■ RT (Radio Text) mode:

Information about the program (such as the title of the song,

name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received

is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters,

including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for

RT data, they are displayed with under-bars.

■ CT (Clock Time) mode:

The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If

the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear.

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):

Refer to “EON Function” on page 33.

Changing the RDS Mode

The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS

data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT

and/or CT that correspond to the RDS data services offered

by the station light up on the display. Press RDS MODE/

FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the

RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order

shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the

RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS

mode is now selected.

Notes

• When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS

MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on

the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up

on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the

unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station.

• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.

• The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the

received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode

requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible

that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes

(PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.

• RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception

conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”

indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode

is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the

display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during

the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut

off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display.

RDS MODE/FREQ

PS mode

PTY mode

RT mode

CT mode

Frequency

display mode

0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM31

PTY SEEK Function

If you select the desired program type, the unit

automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are

broadcasting a program of the required type.

1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the station being received or

“NEWS” flashes on the display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the

desired program type.

The selected program type flashes on the display.

3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all

preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the “PTY

HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while

searching for stations.

• If a station that is broadcasting a program of the

required type is found, the unit stops at that station.

• If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY

SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for

another station that is broadcasting a program of the

same type.

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

■ To cancel this function

Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.

■ Program types in the PTY mode

There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.

NEWS News

AFFAIRS Current affairs

INFO General information

SPORT Sports

EDUCATE Education

DRAMA Drama

CULTURE Culture

SCIENCE Science

VARIED Light entertainment

POP M Pops

ROCK M Rock

M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening)

LIGHT M Light classics

CLASSICS Serious classics

OTHER M Other music

PTY SEEK

MODE START

Flashes

PRESET/TUNING

The selected program type flashes.

Light up

PTY SEEK

MODE START

PS PTY RT CT

PTY HOLD

BASS EXT.

AUTO

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

Flashes

0106V520RDS31-34_EN 2/2/1, 5:35 PM32

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

EON Function

This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station

network. If you simply select the desired program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit

automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are

scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and

switches from the station being currently received to the

new station when the broadcasts starts.

Note

• This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received. When such a station is

being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display.

1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up

on the display.

If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to

another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights

up.

PS PTY RT CT

BASS EXT.

AUTO

EON

STEREO

TUNED

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired

program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or

SPORT).

The selected program type name indicator lights up on

the display.

• If a preset RDS station of the selected program type

starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch

from the program being currently received to that

program. The program type name indicator flashes.

• When broadcasting of the required program ends, the

previously received station (or another program on

the same station) is recalled.

■ To cancel this function

Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up

on the display.

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

EON

PS PTY RT CT

NEWS

BASS EXT.

AUTO

EON

STEREO

TUNED

Lights up

PS PTY RT CT

NEWS

BASS EXT.

AUTO

EON

STEREO

TUNED

Flashes

PS PTY RT CT

BASS EXT.

AUTO

EON

STEREO

TUNED

Lights up

0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM33

RECORDING A SOURCE

SILENT VIDEO AUX

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

INPUT

VOLUME

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

PTY SEEK

MODE START

TUNING

MODE

PRESET

/TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

EDIT

BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E

OFF

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

–

TREBLE

–

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

SURROUND

DIGITAL

1,4

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed

from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for

these components.

1 Set the volume at the

minimum level.

2 Select the source you want to record.

3 Begin recording by the recording component

connected to this unit.

4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to

confirm the input source.

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE

and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot

be recorded.

• Composite video and S video signals pass independently through

this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals, if your video source component is connected to

provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you

can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by

your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records,

CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record

sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.

Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the

player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are

output from the player’s analog outputs.

Remote control

INPUT

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM34

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SET MENU

The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker

mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum

audio/video playback for your system.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

1 SPEAKER SET

CENTER SP

MAIN SP

REAR LR SP

BASS OUT

MAIN LVL

2 HP TONE CTRL

3 I/O ASSIGN

4 INPUT MODE

5 DOLBY D. SET

LFE LEVEL

D-RANGE

6 DTS SET

7 SP DLY TIME

8 DISPLAY SET

9 MEM. GUARD

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

3,6

4,5

ADVANCED OPERATION

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the

item (1 to 9) you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing PRG–.

4 Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the display.

Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to

select a sub item.

5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting

of the item.

6 Press PRG– (or PRG+)

repeatedly until the input

source name appears to

exit from the SET MENU.

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM35

■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range

of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the

left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency

signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the

main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker

mode.

■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if

a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left

and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS

OUT”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NON for “REAR LR SP”.

SET MENU

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than

one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted

will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items

again.

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level

adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN

LVL ” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR

LR SP” are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected

(except “MAIN LVL”).

■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

the unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signals are directed to the left and right main

speakers.

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM36

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ BASS OUT (bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the

main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals.

Notes

• When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette

etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below

90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.

• When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”,

“MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals

(90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and

output to the subwoofer.

■ MAIN LVL (main level mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of

the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because

of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main

speakers.

Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB

Initial setting: NORM

NORM (normal)

Normally select this setting.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using

the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output

level to about one-third of the normal level.

2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

3 I/O ASSIGN

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to

be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack

settings (component names for terminals) differ from that

component. This makes it possible to change the jack

assignment and effectively connect more component.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).

■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT

jack)

Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R

■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R

(3) DVD

(4) D-TV/CBL

SET MENU

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM37

■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT

jack)

Initial setting: (5) CD

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning

on the power of this unit with the source component

connected to more than one type of input jacks.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type

of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital signals.

■ LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby

Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency

special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control value (dB): –20 to 0

Initial setting: 0 dB

Notes

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.

• Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at

home.

■ D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference

between the maximum level and the minimum level of

sounds).

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN

Initial setting: MAX

• Select MAX for feature films.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low

volume level.

SET MENU

Input level

L-LEVEL BST

H-LEVEL CUT

0.0

1.0

MAX

Dialog

level

Input level

Output level

STD

Dialog

level

Output level

MIN

Dialog

level

Output level

Note

• When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because

some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the

minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD.

6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS

signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal.

The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect

sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –10 to +10

Initial setting: 0 dB

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM38

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SET MENU

7 SP DLY TIME (center delay)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel

sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be

the same distance from the listening position as the left and

right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the

center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By

delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent

distance from the center speaker to the listening position can

be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance

between the left and right main speakers to the listening

position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is

especially important for giving depth to the dialog.

Control range (ms): 0 to 5

Initial setting: 0 ms

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of

the center speaker.

8 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the display.

Control range : –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting

of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels

• Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL

Notes

• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test

tone.

• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any

other SET MENU items.

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM39

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

When using the digital sound field processor with the

Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS

decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main

sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as

you wish.

Delay Time

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning

of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of

the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the

value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay

time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some

sources.

• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay

time.

Program Preset value (ms)

1. CONCERT HALL 45

2. JAZZ CLUB 30

3. ROCK CONCERT 15

4. DISCO 26

5CH STEREO 2

GAME 36

5. TV SPORTS 10

6. MONO MOVIE 69

7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23

DGTL SPECTACLE 13

DTS SPECTACLE 13

70 mm SCI-FI 20

DGTL SCI-FI 16

DTS SCI-FI 16

8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20

DGTL ADVENTURE 15

DTS ADVENTURE 15

70 mm GENERAL 20

DGTL GENERAL 15

DTS GENERAL 15

9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5

PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5

Sound Output Level of the Center,

Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers,

and Subwoofer

If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each

speaker even if it has already been adjusted in

“ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,

the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.

This is because the center channel sound is automatically output

from the right and left main speakers.

• Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be

the same for all DSP programs.

Speaker Preset value (dB)

Center 0

Right rear 0

Left rear 0

Subwoofer 0

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 2/2/1, 5:37 PM40

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

DELAY

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

Adjusting Method

Adjustments should be performed with the remote control

while watching the information on the display.

1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the

item you want to adjust.

Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item

changes and appears on the display as below.

Delay time

Center speaker output level

Right rear speaker output level

Left rear speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Note

• Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able

to select all these items.

3 Press – or + to adjust the

delay time or speaker

output levels.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of

any other item.

Notes

• If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS

OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be

adjusted.

• When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings

you made with the test tone will be changed.

• To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting

procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.

If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,

the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/

subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically

return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time

and output levels again.

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM41

SLEEP TIMER

The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit

in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are

going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired

input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the

remote control.

Notes

• First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the

component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit.

• The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit.

Setting the SLEEP Timer

1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are

going to sleep.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

select the desired SLEEP

time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the

SLEEP time will change as

below:

3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the

display after the SLEEP timer has been set.

The display returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the SLEEP Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the display.

It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will

go off.

Note

• The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the

standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or

STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from

the AC power outlet.

120 90 60 30

The SLEEP timer is off

(SLEEP OFF).

(This is the state before

SLEEP is pressed.)

SLEEP

BASS EXT.

Flashes

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

Lights up

0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM42

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is

also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper

manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).

Note

• For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual.

Component Selector Buttons

There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to

control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD

operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled.

AMP(TUNER)

You can perform the basic operations of this

unit.

The code for a YAMAHA CD player is

factory set.

DVD/LD & DVD MENU

An LD player can be controlled in

the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be

controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU

modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD

player is factory set.

TAPE/MD

The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory

set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder

and tape deck can also be set.)

VCR

A VCR can be controlled.

A TV can be controlled.

CBL/SAT

A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.

Notes

• The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details.

• When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your

YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.

Controlling the Components

Connected to This Unit

■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD

player

1 Make sure that the volume is set at the

minimum level.

2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the

component selector.

3 Turn on the power.

4 Press CD on the input selector.

5 Press CD on the

component selector.

6 Press p.

Refer to “Description of Each

Mode” for the CD player

operation buttons.

7 Adjust the volume.

If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes

listed from page i at the end of this manual, you

can control other brands of components. Refer to

“Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details.

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM43

Description of Each Mode

■ TAPE/MD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV.

DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)

SLEEP

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have set the code

for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD

recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD

recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with

a power button if you have set the code.

r REC/PAUSE

This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck

or MD recorder.

p PLAY

This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R.

b DIR A (TAPE)

This button selects the playing direction of deck A.

SKIP– (MD/CD-R)

This button skips to the previous track.

w REWIND (TAPE)

This button rewinds a tape.

SEARCH (MD/CD-R)

This button initiates a backward search on the track

that is playing to find the point from which you want

to listen.

Press TAPE/MD.

Input selector buttons

DECK A/B (TAPE)

This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette

tape deck.

e PAUSE (MD/CD-R)

This button gives a pause in operation.

a DIR B (TAPE)

This button selects the playing direction of deck B.

SKIP+ (MD/CD-R)

This button skips to the next track.

s STOP

This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD

recorder or CD recorder.

f FAST FORWARD (TAPE)

This button winds a tape fast forward.

SEARCH (MD/CD-R)

This button initiates a fast-forward search on the

track that is playing to find the point from which you

want to listen.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM44

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ CD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV INPUT

Press CD.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have set the code

for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD

player that has a remote control with a power button if

you have set the code.

p PLAY

This button plays a CD.

b SKIP–

This button skips to the beginning of the previous

track.

w SEARCH

This button initiates a backward search on the track

that is playing to find the point from which you want

to listen.

Input selector buttons

DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD

changer)

These buttons skip to the next or previous CD.

e PAUSE

This button gives a pause in operation. The

button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating

a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting.

a SKIP+

This button skips to the beginning of the next

track.

s STOP

This button stops operation. The button functions

as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD

players.

f SEARCH

This button initiates a fast-forward search on the

track that is playing to find the point from which

you want to listen.

PAUSE/STOP function

Press the button once to give a pause

in operation and press once more to

stop operation.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM45

■ DVD/LD MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

CLEAR

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

RETURN

MENU UP

MUTE

MENU LEFT

MENU DOWN

TITLE

DISC SKIP –/+

INDEX

MENU SELECT

+10

MENU RIGHT

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

SLEEP

MUTE

SKIP –

STOP

DISC SKIP –/+

6CH INPUT

DISPLAY

PAUSE

PLAY

SKIP +

Press DVD/LD.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have

set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD

player. This button turns on the DVD or

LD player that has a remote control with a

power button if you have set the code.

■ DVD MENU MODE

Notes

• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.

• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.

Input selector buttons

Press DVD MENU.

POWER

This button turns this unit on if you have

set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD

player. This button turns on the DVD or

LD player that has a remote control with

a power button if you have set the code.

Numeric buttons

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM46

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ VCR MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have

set the code for your TV.

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

MUTE

VCR STOP

VCR REWIND

VCR CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

VCR PAUSE

VCR PLAY

VCR

FAST FORWARD

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

VCR POWER

+100

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

MUTE

MENU LEFT

MENU UP

MENU DOWN

RECALL

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

MENU SELECT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MENU RIGHT

CBL/SAT POWER

CHANNEL

EFFECT

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

TV SLEEP

TV MUTE

VCR STOP

VCR REWIND

TV CHANNEL –/+

DISPLAY

VCR PAUSE

VCR PLAY

VCR

FAST FORWARD

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

TV POWER

VCR REC

Press this button twice to

start recording.

■ CBL/SAT MODE

Note

• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have

set the code for your TV.

Press VCR.

Press CBL/SAT.

■ TV MODE

Note

• You can control your VCR if you have set the

code for it.

Press TV.

VCR REC

Press this button twice.

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control

supplied with your component.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM47

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can set the code for the manufacturer of your

component after pressing the component selector buttons

other than AMP(TUNER).

1 Turn on your component to be used.

2 Press one of the

component selector

buttons which

corresponds to the

component to be

controlled.

3 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons to

enter the four-digit

manufacturer code for the

component to be used.

Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash,

repeat step 3 and re-enter the

code.

5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the

remote control to check if you have set the

code correctly.

If your component cannot be

controlled with the remote

control, try setting another code

for the same manufacturer.

Notes

• You can set only one code for one mode.

• In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes:

Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before

entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code

for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component

selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also

simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode.

• If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for

the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with

your component.

■ To use a second (and third) VCR

You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT

and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or

DVD player is not being used.

Note

• In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU

mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in

the DVD/LD mode.

1 Turn on the VCR to be used.

2 Press CBL/SAT or DVD

MENU on the component

selector.

3 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons to

enter the four-digit code

for the second (and third)

VCR. Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash,

repeat step 3 and re-enter the

code.

5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the

remote control to check if you have set the

code correctly.

If the VCR cannot be controlled

with the remote control, try

setting another code for the

same manufacturer.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM48

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

Returning to the Factory Setting

■ To return to the factory-set codes

in all modes

1 Press one of the

component selector

buttons other than

AMP(TUNER).

2 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

3 Enter the code number

“9990”.

Make sure that the indicator

flashes twice.

■ To return to the factory-set codes

in each mode

1 Press one of the

component selector

buttons which

corresponds to the

component to be returned

to the factory-set code.

2 Press both VOLUME

buttons (u/d) at the same

time for about four

seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

3 Enter the code number

“0000”.

Make sure that the indicator

flashes twice.

PRESET REMOTE CONTROL

The following codes are factory set.

Component selector button Component Code Set component Set code

TV TV 0101

CBL/SAT Cable TV 0006

VCR VCR 0002

DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)

CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)

TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)

We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.

0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM49

2 JAZZ CLUB —

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play

back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.

Note

• Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

1 CONCERT HALL —

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field

suitable for background music at parties.

Note

• Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The

sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded

with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.)

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz

club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a

real and vibrant sound.

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from

all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of

presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.

3 ROCK CONCERT —

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was

recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of

the hall.

4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big

city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

5CH STEREO

CINEMA DSP Programs

■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field

employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can

enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs

or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is

oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium

spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old

movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by

using only the presence sound field.

6 MONO MOVIE —

0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM50

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

8 MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm

ADVENTURE

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the

sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is

made to be similar to that of the newest movie

theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field

itself are restrained as much as possible.

GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL This program is for reproducing sounds from

70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is

characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.

The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It

spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the echo effect of conversations without

losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the

harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a

wide space at the rear of the sound field.

DOLBY DIGITAL/

NORMAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR./

ENHANCED

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL

ADVENTURE

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS ADVENTURE DTS

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS GENERAL DTS

9 q/DTS

SURROUND

NORMAL PRO LOGIC/

NORMAL

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS DIGITAL

SUR./NORMAL

DTS

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds

and sound effects from sources.

The highly efficient decoding process improves

crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound

positioning smoother and more precise.

In this program, the digital sound field processor is

not turned on.

ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/

ENHANCED

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DOLBY DIGITAL/

ENHANCED

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby

Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or

DTS decoding and digital sound field processing

create precise effects without altering the original

sound orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to

the left and right, and toward the screen.

■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9

No. Program (group) Sub-program Input source Features

7 MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE 70 mm

SPECTACLE

This program creates the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely

reproduces the source sound in detail, making both

the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is

ideal for any kind of video source encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially

large-scale movie productions).

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DGTL

SPECTACLE

Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS SPECTACLE DTS

SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy

science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field

that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital

(5.1-channel)

DTS SCI-FI DTS

Notes

• The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.

• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker.

• The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5

to 8.

0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM51

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

Presence DSP

sound field

Surround DSP

sound field

■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2

Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by

Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend

to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using

matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization

that 6-channel soundtracks do.

When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel

These programs express an immense sound field and a large

surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the

main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo

theater.

70 mm SPECTACLE

70 mm SCI-FI

70 mm ADVENTURE

70 mm GENERAL

The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home.

With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a

public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.

When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on

each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left

surround and right surround channels. This processing enables

this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround

expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater

without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels.

DGTL SPECTACLE

DTS SPECTACLE

DGTL SCI-FI

DTS SCI-FI

DGTL ADVENTURE

DTS ADVENTURE

DGTL GENERAL

DTS GENERAL

Presence DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to

the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM52

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or

if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX

Refer to

page

The unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON (or

POWER) is pressed, or

enters in the standby

mode soon after the

power has been turned

on.

The power cord is not connected or the plug is

not completely inserted.

Firmly connect the power cord.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the

rear panel is not fully set to the left or right

position.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position

when the unit is in the standby mode.

The protection circuit has been activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the

wire for each connection does not touch

anything other than its respective connection.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT

l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector

buttons).

The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The main speakers to be used have not been

selected properly.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A

and/or B.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel

a mute and adjust the volume.

Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby

Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot

reproduce are being input to this unit by playing

a CD-ROM, etc.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

The picture does not

appear.

The output and input for the video are

connected to different types of video jacks.

Make connections using the same type of jack

(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or

components) for both the input and output.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is

set to the appropriate position and then turn the

unit back on.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn the unit back on.

The sleep timer has functioned.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel

a mute and adjust the volume.

Only the speaker on one

side can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

16, 17

12 – 15

16, 17

—

14, 15

16, 17

12 – 17

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM53

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

No sound from the effect

speakers.

The sound effect is off.

Press EFFECT to turn it on.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoding DSP program is being used with

material not encoded with Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS.

Select another DSP program.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input

to this unit.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is set to

minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

“CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to

NON.

Select the appropriate mode for your center

speaker.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been

selected.

Select another DSP program.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal does not have a center channel

signal.

No sound from the rear

speakers.

The output level of the rear speakers is set to

minimum.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

A monaural source is being played with the

program 9.

Select another DSP program.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is

being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is

being played.

Select BOTH.

The source does not contain low bass signals

(90 Hz and below).

Poor bass reproduction.

“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or BOTH and your system does not

include a subwoofer.

Select MAIN.

The output mode for each speaker (main, center

or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your

speaker configuration.

Select the appropriate output mode for each

speaker based on the size of the speakers in

your configuration.

A “humming” sound can

be heard.

Incorrect cable connections.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

50, 51

—

50, 51

—

36, 37

12 – 15

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM54

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

12 – 15

The volume level cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The component connected to the REC OUT

jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The effect and surround

sounds cannot be

recorded.

It is not possible to record the effect and

surround sounds by a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of

this unit.

A source component is only connected to the

analog input jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the digital

input jacks of this unit.

The settings of the SET

MENU and some other

settings on this unit

cannot be changed.

“9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set

to ON.

Select OFF.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen by

an external electric shock (such as lightning or

excessive static electricity) or by a power

supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

This unit is in the standby mode.

Turn on the power of the unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or the unit.

Move the unit further away from such

equipment.

—

Refer to

page

The unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Problem Cause Remedy

—

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM55

After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you

mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect

the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

TROUBLESHOOTING

—

■ Tuner

Problem

FM stereo reception

is noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the transmitter is

too far away or the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The station is too weak.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Re-store the stations.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna connections

are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient it for best reception.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Cause

Remedy

Refer to

page

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This

will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps,

motors, thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control does

not work nor function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote

control sensor of this unit.

Reposition the unit.

The batteries are weak.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

The unit or other

component cannot be

controlled.

The component to be controlled has not been

selected.

Press one of the component selector buttons,

corresponding to the component to be

controlled.

The remote control cannot control system

components.

The manufacturer code has not been set up

properly.

Enter the code again.

Try setting another code for the same

manufacturer.

Depending on the manufacturer or the model,

some components cannot be controlled with this

unit’s remote control even though the code has

been set up properly.

Use the original remote control supplied with

your component.

—

■ Remote control

Use the manual tuning method. 27

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM56

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 70 W

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ......................................................... 85 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model only]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 105 W

• IEC Output Power

[Europe model only]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 ohms ......................................................... 95/115/135/155 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more

• Frequency Response

CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms)

................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 35 W, 8 ohms)

.................................................................................. 0.025% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)

................................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz) ...................................... 60 dB or more

(10 kHz) .................................... 45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................. 490 mV/390 ohms

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms

• Maximum Input Signal

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more

• Output Level

REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms

SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type .......................................................................... PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) ................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB

• Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply ............................................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz

• Power Consumption .................................................................... 250 W

Standby Mode ......................................................................... 0.96 W

• AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe model] ......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED)

[U.K. model] ............................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)

• Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm

• Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg

• Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control

........................................................................................... Batteries

............................................................................. AM loop antenna

.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna

..................... 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)

...................................................................... Quick Reference Card

............................................................................ Connection Guide

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM57

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording

system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:

two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel

for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With

three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range

audio channels. With an additional channel especially for

bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system

has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume)

reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise

sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and

realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to

a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your

enjoyment.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has

developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the

depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS

digital surround in your home. This system is practically

distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left,

right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE

0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The

frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low

frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by

the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel

systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally

designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in

a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic

effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall

material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so

widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound

heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data,

YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound

field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience

of movie theater in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear

speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a

minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM58

English

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERA

TION

APPENDIX

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

■ S VIDEO signal

With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as

the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio

signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using

any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs

and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for

sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of

time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog

signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for

recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times

the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling

frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the

sound level into a numeric value is called the number of

quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by the

number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that

can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized

bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced.

■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU)

Although component is normally connected according to

jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a

function that assigns jacks according to the component

being connected. If the component being used differs from

the component name shown for this unit’s digital input/

output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the

component being connected. This makes it possible to

change the jack assignment and effectively connect more

component.

GLOSSARY

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM59

INDEX

AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18

Antennas ........................................................................................ 26

BALANCE .................................................................................... 22

BGV function ................................................................................ 22

CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 47

CD mode ........................................................................................ 45

CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 50, 58

Connections

Antennas ................................................................................. 26

Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and

CD player) .............................................................................. 12

External decoder ..................................................................... 12

Power supply cords ................................................................ 18

Speakers ................................................................................. 16

Video components (DVD player, VCR and

TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14

Delay time ..................................................................................... 40

Display ............................................................................................. 8

DISPLAY SET (SET MENU)

DIMMER ............................................................................... 39

DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)

D-RANGE .............................................................................. 38

LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 38

Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 58

Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 58

DSP program

CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 50

Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 50

DTS ............................................................................................... 58

DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 38

Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12

DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 46

DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 46

External decoder ............................................................................ 12

Front panel ....................................................................................... 4

HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 37

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18

INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 38

Input modes ................................................................................... 23

I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 37, 59

LFE .................................................................................... 38, 39, 58

Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 48, i

Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 36, 41

MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 39

Muting ........................................................................................... 22

Package contents ............................................................................. 3

PCM ............................................................................................... 59

Playing ........................................................................................... 21

Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18

Preset stations

Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30

Tuning in to a preset station ................................................... 29

Presetting tuning

Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28

Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29

RDS stations

EON function ......................................................................... 33

PTY SEEK function ............................................................... 32

RDS mode .............................................................................. 31

Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9

Recording ...................................................................................... 34

Remote control

Basic operation ......................................................................... 6

Batteries .................................................................................... 3

Operation range ........................................................................ 7

Setup codes ............................................................................. 48

Sampling frequency ................................................................. 22, 59

SET MENU ................................................................................... 35

SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 58

Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 42

SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 39

Speaker

Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19

Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 40

Placement ............................................................................... 10

SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)

BASS OUT ............................................................................. 37

CENTER SP ........................................................................... 36

MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 37

MAIN SP ................................................................................ 36

REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 36

Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17

S VIDEO ....................................................................................... 59

TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 44

Test tone ........................................................................................ 19

Tuning

Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27

Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27

TV mode ........................................................................................ 47

VCR mode ..................................................................................... 47

Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 58

0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM60

Admiral 0411, 0451, 0911,

1021, 1081

Aiko 0891

Akai 0061, 0101, 0231,

1191, 1351, 1591,

1641, 1791, 1891,

1981

Akura 1331

Alba 1241, 1331, 2361

Albiral 1971

Amstrad 1301, 1511

Anam 1171

Arc En Ciel 0571

Arcam 0571, 0761

Aristona 0751

Arthur Martin 0451, 1641

ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,

0781, 0871, 1021,

1081, 1421, 2051,

2091, 2151, 2551

Astra 1511

Atantic 0761

Atlantic 0761

Atori 1511

Audiosonic 1181, 1321, 1511

Ausind 0491, 1411

Autovox 0091, 0351, 0481,

0491, 0601, 0781,

0951, 1051, 1081,

1391, 1421

Baird 1101, 1351

Bang & Olufsen 1081

Basic Line 1321, 1331

Bauer 1451

Baur 0041, 0061, 0121,

0131, 0221, 1561

Beko 2491, 2501

Blaupunkt 0221, 0231, 0241,

0251, 0471, 0741,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

Brandt 0571, 0651, 0731,

0901, 1821

Brionvega 1021, 1051, 1081

Britannia 0761

Bruns 0821, 0991, 1021,

1081

BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,

1901, 1981

Bush 0451, 1241, 1331,

1641, 1741, 2131,

2151

Bush (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611

Candle 0791

Century 1021, 1081

CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,

1401, 1531, 1611,

1621, 1981, 2201,

2251, 2271

Citizen 0791

Clarivox 0821, 0961, 1971

Clatronic 1181, 1331

Concerto 0791

Condor 0761

Contec 0151, 1171

Continental Edison 0571, 0651,

0901

Craig 1171

Crosley 0021, 0491, 1021,

1081, 1401, 1981,

2201, 2251, 2271

Crown 2541

Ctc Clatronic 0261

CXC 1171

Daewoo 0101, 1501, 1511,

2611

Dansai 0101

Decca 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1691

Decca (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,

1101, 1681

Degraaf 0451, 1351

Dixi 0991, 1511

Domeos 0101

Doric 1031

Dual 0091, 0601, 1611,

1641, 2101

Dual-Tec 0601, 1511, 1621,

2111

Dumont 0261, 0521, 0781,

1021, 1081, 1981,

2121, 2151

Dynatron 0101

Elbe 1551, 1971, 2031

Electro Tech 1511

Elektronska 0771

Elman 0261, 1621

Elta 1511

Emerson 0921, 1021, 1081,

1121, 1171, 1261,

1301

Erres 0101

Etron 1981

Europhon 0261, 0581, 0601,

0771, 1091, 1621,

2001

Fenner 0101, 1511

Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551,

0651, 0781, 0861,

0881, 1131, 1181,

1361, 1461, 1971,

1991, 2281, 2311,

2341

Fidelity 0451, 0761, 2281

Fidelity (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931,

2281

Filmnet 1141

Finlandia 0451, 2321

Finlux 0021, 0261, 0491,

0521, 0781, 0811,

0871, 1081, 1411,

1421, 1981, 2051,

2091, 2121, 2151,

2551

Hitachi 0001, 0011, 0031,

0081, 0141, 0291,

0331, 0341, 0451,

0601, 0631, 0701,

1281, 1561, 1601,

1821, 1831, 1841,

1861, 1871, 1881,

1891, 1941, 1981,

2051, 2321, 2341

Hyper 0591, 0601, 1511,

1621

Imperial 0451, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1401, 1611,

1621, 2201, 2251,

2271

Ingersol 1511

Inno Hit 0581, 0601, 0841,

1101, 1331, 1371,

1511, 2011

Innovation 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

Interfunk 0031, 0041, 0061,

0121, 0181, 0451,

0491, 1081, 1641,

1791, 1821, 1981,

2231

Irradio 0491, 1321, 1331,

1371, 1411, 1511,

2011

Isukai 1331

ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

ITT-nokia 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

JVC (Victor) 0071, 0721, 1441,

1581, 1591, 1741,

1791

Kaisui 0591, 1321, 1331

Kamosonic 0601

Karcher 0591, 0601, 0841,

1091, 1321, 1511,

1561, 2051

Kawasho 0761

Kendo 0261

Kennedy 0021, 0351, 0951,

1981

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT

VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES

LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER

ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES

LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT

First Line 1981

Fisher 0021, 0091, 0141,

0511, 0601, 0801,

0821, 0981, 1021,

1081, 1981, 2091

Forgestone 2281

Formenti 0451, 0491, 0761,

1081, 1451, 1541,

1981

Formenti-phoenix 0021, 0431,

0451, 0591,

1411

Fortress 1081

Frontech 0451, 1181, 1981

Fujitsu 1261

Funai 0391, 0691, 1171,

1181, 1261

Futuretech 1171

GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,

1511, 1621, 1981

GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,

2321

GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,

0601, 1101, 1281,

1561

Geloso 0021, 0411, 0451,

1321, 1511, 1621,

1981

General Technic 2681

Genexxa 0451, 1331

GoldStar 0591, 0601, 0761,

0791, 1371, 1491,

1511, 1561, 1621,

1641

Goodmans 0141, 1101, 1371,

1641, 2301

Gorenje 0981, 1061

Graetz 0451

Granada 0141, 0451, 0491,

0581, 0601, 1101,

1111, 1351, 1981,

2321

Granada (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451,

0491, 0581, 0601,

1031, 1311, 1521,

1561, 1641

Grundig 0221, 0231, 0471,

0491, 0711, 0741,

1381, 2021, 2041,

2141, 2151

Hanseatic 0021, 0121, 0141,

0431, 0591, 1561

Hantarex 0581

Hemmermann 0061

Hifivox 0331, 0571

Hinari 0071, 0141, 0451,

1261, 1351, 1511,

1641, 1981, 2011

08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM1

Konka 2701

Korting 0431, 1011, 1021,

1081, 1541

KTV 0601, 1171

Lenoir 0601, 1511

Leyeo 1181

Lifetec 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

Loewe Opta 0121, 0131, 0581,

0611, 1081

Logic 1691, 2281

Logik 0551, 1681, 2281

Lowewe 0831

Luma 0351, 0451, 1901

Luxman 0791

Luxman Stereo Tuner 0791

Luxor 0001, 0061, 0181,

0341, 0421, 0451,

0461, 0491, 0601,

0671, 1351, 1371,

1561, 1601, 1911,

1921, 1981

Lyco 1181

Magnadyne 0021, 0061, 0261,

0581, 0641, 0771,

1021, 1081, 1621,

1981

Magnafon 0261, 0491, 0581,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 2001

Manesth 0101

Marantz 0101

Marelli 1081

Mark 0101

Matsui 0061, 0451, 0601,

0691, 1101, 1151,

1241, 1271, 1301,

1511, 1561, 1681,

1691

Maximal 0071, 1981

McMichael 1281

Medion 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

Memorex 1511

Metz 0231, 0741, 1001,

1041, 1081, 1481,

2071, 2081

MGA 1231

Micromaxx 2591, 2621, 2641,

2651, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

Minerva 0221, 0231, 0491,

1381, 2141, 2151

Mistral 2281

Mitsubishi 0141, 0201, 0231,

0661, 1191, 1201,

1231, 1671, 1691,

1741

Mivar 0491, 0501, 0581,

0591, 0761, 0771,

1371, 1431, 2031

MTC 0791

Multitech 0261, 0581, 0601,

0641, 0981, 1321,

1511

Murphy 0451, 2091

Murphy (UK) 0081, 1031

N.E.I. 0101, 0961

NAD 1341

NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,

1731

Neckermann 0451, 0601, 0981,

1081, 1561, 1931,

1981, 2211, 2231,

2241

Nediator 0101

Nicamagic 0761

Nikkai 1101, 1331, 1641,

1701, 2011

Nobliko 0261, 0491, 0591,

0641, 1381, 1411

Nogamatic 0571

Nokia 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431, 2461, 2791

Nordmende 0031, 0291, 0331,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 1051, 1131,

1591, 1791, 1811,

1821, 1891, 1941,

2631

Oceanic 0321, 1651, 1981

Oceanic (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,

0441, 1661

Onceas 0601

Onwa 1171

Orion 0061, 0391, 0691,

0851, 1211, 1241,

1251, 1301, 1481,

1511, 1681, 1691,

1981, 2371, 2421

Osaka 2011

Osaki 1101, 1331, 2011

Osume 0151

Otto Versand 0021, 0121, 0141,

0221, 0601, 1561,

1741, 1981

Pael 0591, 1411

Panasonic 0031, 0201, 0211,

0451, 0701, 1311,

1751, 1961, 2561,

2741

Panoramic 2351

Pathe Marconi 0571

Pathe’ Cinema (F) 0431, 0591,

1621, 1661,

1971

Pausa 1511

Pauza 1511

Perdio 0891, 1101

Philco 0021, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1021, 1081,

1401, 1611, 1621,

1751, 2201, 2251,

2271, 2451, 2471

Philips 0101, 0361, 0591,

0621, 0681, 0751,

0761, 1021, 1081,

1281, 2031, 2281,

2291, 2431, 2441,

2511, 2731

Phoenix 1081

Phonola 0751, 1081

Pioneer 0291, 0451, 1341,

1821

Prandoni-prince 0411, 0451,

0491, 0581,

1411

Prandoni-promce 0451, 0491,

0581

Prima 0451

Profex 1981

Protech 0641, 1181, 1981

Quelle 0041, 0061, 0121,

0221, 0231, 0391,

0491, 0521, 0601,

0781, 1371, 1381,

1411, 1421, 1641,

1681, 2051, 2091,

2141, 2151, 2201,

2211, 2231, 2241,

2251, 2271, 2551,

2571, 2581

Radiomarelli 0101, 0451, 0661,

0771, 1081

Radionette 0031, 2051, 2091

Radiola 2291

Rank 0481, 2151

Rbm 2131, 2151

Rbm (UK) 0481

Rediffusion 0451, 0661, 1641,

1981, 2331

Rediffusion (UK) 0061, 0081,

1031

Rex 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

Rft 0991, 2511

Roadstar 1321, 1511

Rotel 0151

Saba 0291, 0331, 0421,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 0581, 0651,

0731, 0931, 1021,

1071, 1081, 1131,

1791, 1811, 1821,

1891, 1941, 2631

Saccs 1971

Saisho 0451, 0601, 1161,

1241, 1301, 1511,

1671, 1681, 1691

Salora 0011, 0041, 0061,

0071, 0341, 0451,

0671, 1291, 1351,

1521, 1561, 1601,

1641, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1981, 2321

Sambers 0261, 0491, 0581,

0641, 1091, 1371,

1411, 2001

Samsung 0101, 0601, 0841,

0981, 1101, 1181,

1371, 1511, 2011

Sanyo 0141, 0151, 0401,

0601, 0801, 0821,

0981, 1021, 1101,

1111, 1291, 1351,

1691, 1741, 2051,

2091, 2551

SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,

2281

Schaub Lorenz 0451

Schneider 0021, 0071, 0091,

0451, 0511, 0591,

0601, 0751, 1321,

1361, 1621, 1641,

2101, 2111, 2291

Scott 1171, 1261

SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,

0991

SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,

1301, 1481, 1981

Seleco 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

Sentra 1601

Sharp 0141, 0151, 0191,

1761, 1781

Siarem 0021, 0261, 0581,

0641, 1021, 1081,

1981

Sicatel 1971

Siemens 0151, 0221, 0231,

0451, 0741, 2011,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

Silver 1181

Singer 0021, 0261, 1021,

1081

Sinudyne 0101, 0021, 0061,

0261, 0391, 0641,

0691, 0851, 0941,

1021, 1081, 1241,

1301, 1321, 1481,

1631, 1981

Skantic 0451

Solavox 0451, 1641, 2011

Sonoko 1181, 1511, 0101

Sony 0141, 0171, 1121,

1681, 1691, 2751

Soundesign 1171

SSS 1171

Stern 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

Sunkai 0691

Supra 0791

Tandberg 0161, 0331, 0611,

1021, 1421, 1771,

1791, 2081

Tandy 0451, 0191, 1331,

1531

Tashiko 0141

Tatung 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1681,

1691

Tcm 2621, 2641, 2711,

2761, 2771, 2781

Technics 1311

Techwood 0791

Teknika 1171, 1231, 1261

Tele 1141

Teleavia 0571, 0651, 0731,

1821

Telefunken 0291, 0301, 0311,

0551, 0731, 1131,

1471, 1591, 1791,

1801, 1811, 1821,

1991, 2161, 2171,

2181, 2191, 2201,

2251, 2271, 2521,

2631

Teletech 1511

Tempest 2381, 2391, 2401,

2411

Tensai 1331, 2091

Texet 0601

Thomson 0331, 0481, 0531,

0571, 0631, 0651,

0731, 0901, 1241,

1571, 1591, 1791,

1811, 1821, 1891,

1941, 2531

Thorn 0741, 0861, 2091,

2251, 2271, 2281

08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM2

iii

Thorn-Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551,

0651, 0781, 0861,

0881, 1131, 1181,

1361, 1461, 1971,

1991, 2281

TMK 0141, 0791, 1471

Toshiba 0141, 0381, 0481,

1221, 1271, 1701,

1741, 1851, 2151,

2801, 2811

Trans Continens 0451

Tristar 2281

Triumph 0481, 0581, 2121

Uher 0431, 0451, 0481,

0491, 0511, 1311,

1541

Ultravox 0021, 0261, 0591,

1021, 1081, 1981

Universum 1181, 2051

Univox 1971

Vegavox 0811

Vexa 0101, 1511

Videoton 2481

Vortec 0101, 0651

Voxson 0411, 0451, 0491,

1021, 1081

Waltham 0451

Watson 0431, 2201, 2241

Watt Radio 0021, 0061, 0261,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 1971, 1981,

2001

Wega 0141, 1081, 1981

Wega Color 1021

Weltblick 0101

Weston 1621

White Westinghouse 0101, 0261,

0431, 0591,

0761, 1401,

1541

Yoko 0601, 1511

Zanussi 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

Zoppas 0451

CABLE

Cabletime 1446, 1456, 1476

Clyde Cablevision 1426

Filmnet 1396, 1436

France Telecom 1386

GEC 1426

Jerrold 1416

Movie Time 1466

NSC 1466

Philips 1386

Pioneer 0006

Samsung 1496

Scientific Atlanta 1486, 1506

Starcom 1416

STS 1466

Tele 1436

Tele+1 1436

Teleservice 1406, 1476

Tudi 1376

United Cable 1416

Zenith 1406

SATELLITE TUNER

Akai 1276

Alba 0826, 1276

Amstrad 0166, 0796, 1016,

1026, 1296

Ankaro 0476

Ast 0406

Astra 0126

Barcom 0476

Blaupunkt 0966

Bmc Satellite 0106

British Telecom 1276

Bush 0826

Bush (UK) 0956

Cambridge 0196, 1276

Chaparral 0016, 0696, 1006

Columbus 0616

Connexions 0306, 0426

Discus Elipse 0856, 0866

Diskxpress 0426, 0476

Drake 1516

Echostar 0226, 0236, 0606,

0626, 0666, 0926,

0996, 1046, 1056,

1066, 1106

Elta 1286

Elta Sat 0146

Eurodec 1226, 1236, 1246

Ferguson 0046, 0176, 0186,

0296, 0846, 0956,

1306

Finlux 0976

Fracarro 0026, 0536, 0776

Fuba 0476, 0616, 0636,

1056

Giucar Record 0206, 0336

Grundig 0176, 0946, 0956,

0966

High Performance 0916

Hirschmann 0756, 0966

Hitachi 0446, 0516, 0706,

0946

Icx International 0886

ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

ITT/Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

Jeemon 0146

Jerrold 0846, 0986

Johansson 0246

JVC (Victor) 1276

Kathrein 0116, 0266, 0276,

0366

Kosmos 0266

Kyostar 1036, 1086

Leng 0246

Lifesat 1326, 1346, 1356

Luxor 0126, 0136, 0446,

0466, 0506, 1156

Macab 0356

Maspro 0016, 0116, 0256,

0956

Medion 1326, 1346

Metz 0966

Micromaxx 1326, 1346

Mitsubishi 0966

Morgans 0596

Muratto 0406

NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,

0786, 0836

Network 0046

Nikko 1136, 1146

Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156, 1166,

1336

Norsat 0786

Otto Versand 0966

Pace 0046, 0176, 0296,

0936, 0956, 1306

Pace Mss 0946

Palcom 0616, 0686, 0706

Palsat 0396

Paltec 0706

Panasonic 0806, 1306

Pansat 1076

Philips 0326, 0346, 0476,

0956, 1126, 1186,

1196, 1206, 1216,

1306, 1316

Prosat 1176

Ptt Telecom 0306, 0896

Quelle 0966

Radix 1056

Rediffusion 0316, 0786

Rft 1186, 1196, 1206,

1216

Sagem 1256

Sakura 0566, 0816

Salora 0066, 0126, 0136,

0446, 0456, 0486,

0496, 0576

Samsung 0746, 0756

Sat 0406

Satcom 0896

Sateco 0646

Sector 1266

Sedea 1096

Sentra 0416

Siemens 0896, 0966

Sintrack 0906

Skylab 0476

Skyscan 0876

Sony 0736, 0946

Stella 0306

Strong 0156, 0396, 1036,

1086

Stv 0636

Tandberg 1116, 1366

Tandy 0916

Tantec 0616

Tatung 0516, 0546

Technisat 0086, 0096, 0526,

0556, 1056

Telecom 0306

Telemax 0586

Thorn-Ferguson 0046, 0076,

0176, 0186,

0956

Toshiba 0946

Triad 0406

Uniden 0036, 0216, 0676,

0716, 0726

US Electronics 0886

Vortec 0756, 1036, 1076

Vtech 0436

Winersat 0246

Wisi 0056, 0356, 0376,

0386, 0406, 0656,

1056, 1156

Wolsey 0916

Zehnder 0266, 0406

Zender 0406

VCR

Aiwa 0042, 0352, 0432

Akai 0042, 0422, 0492,

0582, 0612, 0642,

0652, 0762, 0912

Alba 0002, 0112, 0282,

0332, 0342, 0972

Amstrad 0322, 0432, 0452

Anitech 0002

Anitsch 1002

ASA 0012, 0052

Audiosonic 0002

Baird 0042, 0282, 0492

Bang & Olufsen 0042

Baur 0052, 0062, 0812

Blaupunkt 0062, 0092, 0252,

0462, 0672, 0992

Brionvega 0032

Bush 0002, 0282, 0332,

0342, 0512, 0972

Bush (UK) 0812

Capehart 0112

CGE 0042, 0432, 0762

Craig 0072, 0482

Crown 0112, 0282, 1212

Daewoo 0112, 0282, 1212

Dansai 0012

Daytron 0112

Decca 0042, 0052, 0432,

0942

Decca (UK) 0052

Degraaf 0052, 0132, 0432,

0532, 0602

Dixi 0442

Dual 0042, 0632

Dumont 0052, 0432, 0532

Dynatech 0432

Dynatron 0012

Elbe 0122

Elin 0072

Emerson 0012, 0162, 0202,

0432, 0512, 0522

Erres 0012

Ferguson 0042, 0712, 0722,

0852, 0902, 1012,

1022, 1082

Fidelity 0432

Finlandia 0052, 0532

Finlux 0012, 0042, 0052,

0082, 0262, 0382,

0432, 0462, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0602,

0912

First Line 0002, 0912

Fisher 0162, 0482, 0532,

0542, 0572, 0592

Formenti-Phoenix 0012, 0052

Frontech 0112

Funai 0432

GBC 0002

GEC (UK) 0022, 0052

Geloso 0002

General Technic 1172

GoldStar 0012, 0812, 0952,

1202

Goodmans 0002, 0072, 0282,

0432, 0502

Goodmans (UK) 0002

Graetz 0022, 0042

Granada 0052, 0132, 0532,

0572

Granada (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462,

0602, 0812, 0822

08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM3

Grundig 0052, 0062, 0092,

0232, 0252, 0262,

0752, 0802

Hanseatic 0052, 0812

Harman/Kardon 0922, 1202

Hcm 0002

Hinari 0002, 0202, 0412,

0442, 0522

Hitachi 0042, 0172, 0292,

0432, 0602, 0662,

0812, 1022

Imperial 0072, 0432

Ingersol 0442

Inno Hit 0002, 0052, 0072

Innovation 1142, 1162, 1172

Interfunk 0022, 0052

Irradio 0002, 0012

ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

ITT-Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

Jensen 0042

JVC (Victor) 0042, 0102, 0142,

0272, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0902

Karcher 0052, 0072, 0812

Kendo 0492

Kenwood 0042, 0142, 0572

Lifetec 1142, 1162, 1172

Lloyd 0432

Loewe Opta 0052, 0092, 0152

Logik 0002, 0072, 0442

Luma 0162

Luxor 0492, 0572, 0812

M Electronic 0432

Magnadyne 0052

Magnasonic 0572

Manesth 0012

Marantz 0012, 0052, 0092,

0502, 1202

Mark 0012

Marta 0012

Matsui 0012, 0442, 0512,

0522, 0812, 0972

Medion 1142, 1162, 1172

Memorex 0012, 0132, 0432,

0482, 0532, 0572

Metz 0062, 0092, 0932

MGA 0912

Micromaxx 1142, 1162, 1172

Minerva 0062, 0092, 0252

Minolta 0172, 0602

Mitsubishi 0052, 0062, 0142,

0912, 0922

MTC 0072, 0432

Multitech 0002, 0052, 0062,

0282, 0432

Murphy 0432

N.E.I. 0012, 0052

National 0462

NEC 0042, 0122, 0142,

1202

Neckermann 0032, 0042, 0052,

0072, 0092, 0202,

0522, 0572, 0762,

0812

Nikkai 0112

Nobliko 0092

Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762,

1152

Nordmende 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0222, 0242,

0392, 0402, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0792, 0832,

0842, 0872

Olympus 0462

Optonica 0132, 0502

Orion 0162, 0202, 0312,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0982

Osaka 0432

Osaki 0002, 0012, 0432

Otto Versand 0052, 0062, 0812

Panasonic 0022, 0212, 0462,

0672, 0992, 1092,

1102, 1182

Pentax 0172, 0602

Perdio 0432

Philco 1062

Philips 0052, 0082, 0092,

0152, 0182, 0362,

0372, 0472, 0502,

1072

Phonola 0052, 0152

Pilot 0012

Pioneer 0052, 0142, 0372,

0472

Portland 0112

Proline 0432

Pye 0052, 0152

Quartz 0572

Quelle 0012, 0032, 0042,

0052, 0062, 0072,

0092, 0202, 0462,

0552, 0942

Radionette 0022

Realistic 0012, 0072, 0132,

0432, 0482, 0502,

0532, 0572

Ret 1072

Rex 0042, 0742, 0782

Ricoh 0952

Saba 0042, 0142, 0192,

0222, 0242, 0392,

0632, 0732, 0742,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0792, 0872

Saisho 0162, 0202, 0292,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0972

Salora 0192, 0572, 0812,

0822, 0912

Samsung 0052, 0072, 0652,

1192, 1212

Sansui 0042, 0142

Sanyo 0482, 0532, 0562,

0572

SBR 0052, 0152, 0182

Schaub Lorenz 0022, 0042

Schneider 0002, 0012, 0052,

0072, 0432

SEG 0002, 0072

Sei-Sinudyne 0442

Seleco 0042

Sentra 0112

Sharp 0132, 0502, 0702

Shintom 0002

Siemens 0062, 0092, 0252,

0572

Sinudyne 0052, 0382, 0442,

0932

Sonoko 0282

Sony 0432, 0552, 0682,

0692, 0942, 0952,

0962, 1122, 1132

STS 0602

Sunkai 0512

Sunstar 0432

Sylvania 0432, 0912

Symphonic 0432, 0912

Tandegerg 0062, 0162, 0522,

0932

Tashiko 0132, 0432

Tatung 0042, 0052, 0432,

0922

TCM 1142, 1162, 1172

Teac 0042, 0432

Technics 0462

Teknika 0012, 0432

Telefunken 0042, 0192, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0882, 0892

Tempest 1032, 1042, 1052

Tenosal 0002

Thomson 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0402, 0632,

0762

Thorn 0042, 0902

Thorn-Ferguson 0042, 0222, 0302,

0712, 0722, 0742,

0762, 0852, 0862,

0872, 0902

TMK 0522

Tonsai 0002

Toshiba 0042, 0622, 0912,

1212

Totevision 0012, 0072

Triumph 0922

Uher 0042, 0072

Ulravox 0032

Unitech 0072

Vector Research 0122

Videon 1162, 1172

Weltblick 0012

White Westinghouse 0032

Xenon 0162

Yamaha 0042, 1202

Yoko 0012, 0062, 0072

DVD PLAYER

Akai 0108

Denon 0368

Hitachi 0388

JVC (Victor) 0168, 0348

Kenwood 0288

Magnavox 0248

Mitsubishi 0268

Onkyo 0128, 0248

Panasonic 0048

Philips 0188, 0248

Pioneer 0208, 0228

Proscan 0308

RCA 0067, 0308

Samsung 0148

Sharp 0068

Sony 0028

Technics 0048

Thomson 0328

Toshiba 0088, 0248

Yamaha 0008, 0048, 0188,

0248

Zenith 0248

LD PLAYER

Aiwa 0137

Funai 0137

Hitachi 0047

Magnavox 0077

Panasonic 0027

Pioneer 0037

Realistic 0137

Samsung 0017, 0087

Sony 0057, 0097, 0107,

0117

Victor 0127

Yamaha 0007

CD PLAYER

Accuphase 0315

Adc 0865

Adcom 0785, 1015

Akai 0115, 0125, 0725,

0735, 0745, 0935,

1155

Arcam 1875

Arcam-Rotel 0165

Audio-Technica 0835

Audiosonic 0155

Awia 1105, 1235, 1245,

1765, 1915, 1935

BSR 0875

California Audio Lab 1075

Carrera 0555, 0875

Carver 0825, 1415

Cyrus-Rotel 0205

Denon 0045, 0955, 1045,

1595, 1795, 1805

Dual 1005

Elin 0185

Emerson 1015, 1285, 1675

Fisher 0105, 0595, 0605,

0825, 1165, 1175

Genexxa 0525, 0825, 0855,

0875, 0995, 1265,

1285, 1345, 1355,

1485, 1575, 1675,

1715, 1825

GoldStar 0555, 1185, 1195,

1585

Grundig 0175

Harman Kardon 0495, 0565, 0325,

1135, 1145, 1155

Hitachi 0065, 0585, 0685,

0945, 1005, 1015,

1225, 1545

Innovation 1995, 2005, 2015

ITT-Nokia 0185

JVC (Victor) 0385, 0395, 0455,

0575, 0585

Karcher 0485

Kenwood 0025, 0055, 0145,

0215, 0595, 0675,

0695, 0705, 0715,

0925, 1355, 1485,

1575, 1675, 1715,

1825

Korting 0175

Lifetec 2015

Light Control 1155, 1645, 1655,

1665

Linn 0165, 1875

Luxman 0265, 0275, 0795,

0805, 1295, 1305,

1555, 1925

Luxor 0185, 1895, 1905

Magnavox 1865, 1875

08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 7:24 PM4

Marantz 0165, 0175, 0545,

0665, 1275, 1335,

1405, 1505, 1875,

1955

Matsushita 1095, 1605

MCS 0535

Medion 0075, 1995, 2005,

2015

Memorex 0525, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1675

MGA 1125

Micromaxx 2015

Mission 0165, 1875

Mitsubishi 1125, 1205

NAD 0255, 0285, 0295,

0305, 0345, 0135,

0755, 0765, 1315,

1325

Nakamichi 0635, 0645, 1565

NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,

0785

Neckerman 0155, 0225

Nikko 0835, 1165

Oceanic 0185

Okano 0155, 0225

Onkyo 0885, 1385, 1425,

1455, 1515

Panasonic 1055, 1075, 1615,

1625

Philips 0165, 0175, 0195,

1865, 1875

Pioneer 0095, 0335, 0425,

0435, 0445, 0525,

0855, 1035, 1945

Proton 0905, 1875

Quasar 1075

Radiola 1845, 1855

Radiotone 0485

Realistic 0825, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1575

Rotel 1875

Saba 1005

SAE 1875

Salora 0185

Sansui 0415, 0965, 0975,

0985, 1255, 1675,

1875

Sanyo 0625, 0825, 0845,

0915

Schneider 1845, 1855

Scott 1285, 1675

Sharp 0025, 0035, 1025,

1115, 1275, 1635,

1785, 1815, 1825,

1835

Sherwood 1275, 1445

Siemens 1085

Signature 1155

Sony 0345, 0355, 0365,

0375, 0865, 1685,

1695, 1705, 1715,

1725, 1735, 1745

Sytvania 1875

Tandberg 1885

Tashiko 1525

TCM 1985, 2015

Teac 0235, 0245, 1275,

1365, 1375, 1395,

1435, 1465, 1475

Technics 0465, 0475, 1065,

1075, 1625

Telefunken 1005

Theta Digital 1865

Thomson 1005

Toshiba 0755, 0765

Vector Research 0555, 0865

Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085,

0345, 0615, 0655,

0815, 0835, 0895

CD-RECORDER/CD-RW

Hitachi 0304

JVC (Victor) 0334

Marantz 0314, 0324

Philips 0274

Pioneer 0284, 0294

Yamaha 0244

MD RECORDER

Kenwood 0214

Pioneer 0254

Sharp 0264

Sony 0224

Yamaha 0024, 0224, 0234

TAPE DECK

Akai 0124

Denon 0204

Grundig 0134

Harman 0044

JVC (Victor) 0194

Kenwood 0164

Korting 0134

Luxman 0054, 0064, 0074,

0084

Marantz 0134, 0144

NAD 0174

Onkyo 0184

Philips 0134, 0144, 0154

Pioneer 0034, 0114

Sony 0094, 0104

Yamaha 0004, 0014

08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM5

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-5450RDS

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

G B

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

HTR-5450RDS

Printed in Malaysia ID

V735940

00RX-HTR5450RDS-cv1/4 2/1/1, 4:42 PM1

SPEAKERS

MAIN

—

R L

—

CENTER REAR

(SURROUND)

—

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

VCR 1

OUT

OUT(REC)

IN(PLAY)

AUX

MD/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AM ANT GND

FM ANT

UNBAL.

TUNER

MAIN

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

AUDIO OUT S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO

OUT

S VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

RLRL

DVD player

Main speakers A Main speakers B

Rear speakers

Video signal

Optical signal

Signal flow

Center speaker

Subwoofer

system

Video Monitor

Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)

Analog signal

(U.S.A. model)

S Video signal

L R

RX-V520/RX-V520RDS

HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only

V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML)

SLEEP

TEST

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

VOLUME

–/+

POWER

TIME/LEVEL

Quick Reference Card

DISPLAY (MD)

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

REC/PAUSE

PLAY

DIR A (TAPE)

SKIP– (MD)

REWIND (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

PAUSE (MD)

DECK A/B (TAPE)

DIR B (TAPE)

SKIP+ (MD)

STOP

FAST FORWARD (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

TAPE/MD

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

PLAY

SKIP–

PAUSE

TV INPUT

SKIP+

STOP

DISC SKIP–/+

DVD/LD

DISPLAY

SLEEP

EFFECT

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

PLAY

SKIP–

PAUSE

TV INPUT

SKIP+

STOP

DISC SKIP–/+

V728130

SET

EFFECT

6CH INPUT

PRESET–/+

TV VOLUME

PRG+,

PRG–

Input selector

buttons

TV INPUT

AMP(TUNER)

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

6CH INPUT

Input selector

buttons

V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:37 PM1

Quick Reference Card

RETURN

TITLE

CLEAR

INDEX

+10

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

DISC SKIP–/+

POWER

Numeric buttons

TV INPUT

DVD MENU

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

MENU UP

CHANNEL

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL–/+

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

+100

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

CBL/SAT

POWER

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

RECALL

MENU UP

TV INPUT

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

CBL/SAT

CHANNEL

ENTER

VCR REC

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

EFFECT

TV MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

POWER

VCR PLAY

VCR

REWIND

CHANNEL

VCR

PAUSE

TV INPUT

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

CHANNEL–/+

CHANNEL

ENTER

DISPLAY

TV SLEEP

EFFECT

CHANNEL

ENTER

MUTE

TV VOLUME

VOLUME

VCR

POWER

VCR PLAY

VCR

REWIND

CHANNEL

VCR

PAUSE

TV INPUT

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

VCR

CHANNEL–/+

VCR

VCR REC

Press this button twice to start recording.

Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.

Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.

Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.

V728130

*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.

Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.

Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.

V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:38 PM2

Documenttranscriptie

GB HTR-5450RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-HTR5450RDS-cv1/4 1 HTR-5450RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V735940 2/1/1, 4:42 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101V520RDS_caution_EN 2 1/31/1, 4:20 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3 Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3 Battery Replacement .............................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4 4 6 7 8 9 SET MENU ......................................................... 35 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 35 36 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................. Remote Control ...................................................... Using the Remote Control ...................................... Display ................................................................... Rear Panel .............................................................. INTRODUCTION FEATURES .......................................................... 2 GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .......................................................... 40 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10 Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10 Speaker Placement ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19 Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19 Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19 SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 42 Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 42 Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 42 PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 43 Component Selector Buttons ............................... Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit .......................................................... Description of Each Mode ................................... Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... BASIC OPERATION Before Connecting Components ........................... 11 Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12 Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12 Connecting Video Components ............................ 14 Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18 Delay Time ........................................................... 40 Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 40 Adjusting Method ................................................ 41 43 43 44 48 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 50 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 50 CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 50 PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21 Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23 Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24 Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ........................................................... 25 TUNING ............................................................. 26 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 53 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 57 GLOSSARY ....................................................... 58 INDEX ................................................................ 60 26 27 27 28 29 29 30 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ..................................... Automatic Tuning ................................................ Manual Tuning ..................................................... Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS stations only) .................................... Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... To Recall a Preset Station .................................... Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................ 31 Description of RDS Data ..................................... Changing the RDS Mode ..................................... PTY SEEK Function ............................................ EON Function ...................................................... 31 31 32 33 RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 34 English 1 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1 1/31/1, 4:20 PM FEATURES 5-Channel Power Amplification Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks ◆ SLEEP Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning Automatic Preset Tuning Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2 1/31/1, 4:20 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check that the following items are included in your package. Remote control AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Quick reference card 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Connection guide BASIC OPERATION Battery Replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control will return to the factory settings. 2 Notes 1 Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery compartment cover. English 1 3 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 3 APPENDIX 3 • Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION Battery Installation in the Remote Control PREPARATION Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) 2/1/1, 2:24 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 3 2 6 78 45 9 0 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO SILENT q w r e ty u VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX i o pa s df g 1 STANDBY/ON 6 EON Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on, set the volume at the minimum level. Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor 7 PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. 8 INPUT MODE 3 Display Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO, DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. This shows various information. 9 VOLUME 4 PTY SEEK MODE Turn this control to turn up or down the volume. Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. 0 6CH INPUT 5 RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). This receives signals from the remote control. When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or frequency display mode in turn. 4 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 4 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q BASS i VIDEO AUX jacks Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the low-frequency response. Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a game console to these jacks. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. w TREBLE Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. e BALANCE r SPEAKERS A/B When “ z ” appears on the display: This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8). Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset station number. When “ z ” goes off from the display: This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies. When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button to select a program type. p A/B/C/D/E Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E). a PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) t PROGRAM l / h s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the selected program appears on the display. Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only). y EFFECT d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels of the right and left speakers may not match. Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. u PHONES jack f FM/AM Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this unit outputs audio signals for private listening. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position. Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. ADVANCED OPERATION Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and switch the function between for storing a broadcasting station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. BASIC OPERATION Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker system that you don’t want to use. PREPARATION This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. o PRESET/TUNING l / h INTRODUCTION Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the high-frequency response. g INPUT l / h APPENDIX Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX, MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected input source appears on the display. English 5 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 5 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” for full details. 3 POWER Each time you press this button, the unit switches between the power on and standby mode. 4 TEST Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker. 1 5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ Press AMP(TUNER). 2 These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) 3 6 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button again. q w e 4 7 VOLUME These buttons are used to adjust the volume level. u: To turn up the volume d: To turn down the volume 8 SLEEP 5 Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. 9 –/+ 6 TV VOLUME 7 These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. 0 TIME/LEVEL 8 TV INPUT 9 Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL mode. q Input selector buttons r 0 t 1 Indicator This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected button again. These buttons select the input source. CD: To play a CD TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape deck) DVD: To play a DVD D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV VCR: To play a video cassette AUX: To use another audio component V-AUX: To use another audio/video component w 6CH INPUT Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 2 Component selector buttons Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. (The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. 6 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 6 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS e EFFECT Using the Remote Control Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). r PRG+, PRG– INTRODUCTION Press these buttons to select a DSP program. Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for selecting the SET MENU item. Remote control sensor t SET MENU Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU. Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) ADVANCED OPERATION Handle the remote control with care. Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – extremely low temperature. BASIC OPERATION Notes • • • • PREPARATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the sensor, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. APPENDIX English 7 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 7 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Display 1 2 4 3 VIRTUAL DOLBY DTS DIGITAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC ENHANCED MONO TV SPORTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO 5CH STEREO 78 9 6 5 PS PTY CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB PTY HOLD ROCK CONCERT NEWSINFO BASS EXT. MEMORY GAME RT CT AUTO EON STEREO AFFAIRS SPORT TUNED SLEEP DSP PCM 0 dB ms SP AB q K HZ e w r t y u 1 t indicator 9 STEREO indicator The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. 2 VIRTUAL indicator 0 x indicator This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. “ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. 3 g and o indicators “ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. q v indicator 4 DSP program indicators This lights up when headphones are connected. This indicates the name of the selected DSP program. e Multi-information display 5 PTY HOLD indicator This display shows various information: for example the name of the selected input source and the various settings during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner is selected as the input source. This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 6 RDS mode indicators The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. 7 EON indicator This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. 8 AUTO indicator This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. w Headphones indicator r MEMORY indicator This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. t Program type name indicators The name of the selected program type lights up when the “EON” indicator lights up. y TUNED indicator This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. u SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 8 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 8 2/2/1, 5:34 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 R TUNER AM ANT GND + – SPEAKERS 7 – + L FM ANT MAINS A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. 8 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL INPUT CD 6 5 MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD SURROUND L L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL B VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 REAR R (SURROUND) L MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION – R DIGITAL OUTPUT AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL 9 OUT VCR 1 0 q (Europe model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 8 AC OUTLET(S) 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video components (see page 18). 3 6CH INPUT jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. See page 26 for connection information. 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. 9 Audio component jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 0 SUBWOOFER jack See page 17 for connection information. q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18). 7 AC power cord ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Antenna input terminals BASIC OPERATION As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Connect to a power outlet. APPENDIX English 9 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 9 1/31/1, 4:21 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use highperformance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. 10 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 10 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS INTRODUCTION Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows: video signals (composite) V V White analog audio signals for the left channel L L Red analog audio signals for the right channel R R coaxial digital signals C C BASIC OPERATION Yellow PREPARATION When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 11 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 11 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). 12 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 12 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT External decoder CD player INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L R R L CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND 75 PREPARATION COAXIAL FM ANT UNBAL. OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R DIGITAL OUTPUT L AUX CD R OUTPUT IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL O OUT VCR 1 L R L OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL INPUT O R INPUT Audio component BASIC OPERATION (Europe model) IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L English 13 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 13 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ Audio signal jacks Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ Video signal jacks Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ TV monitor with a 21-pin connector Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable. ■ S VIDEO jacks Video monitor DVD player S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN S D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT Notes • Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S VIDEO connection. • If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their respective output jacks. S DVD If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks. Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video component to this unit’s composite video jacks. MONITOR OUT VIDEO S VIDEO S S S S S Video signal Signal flow S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT TV/digital TV, cable TV or satellite tuner S VIDEO IN VCR ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console S VIDEO OUT 14 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 14 2/1/1, 2:23 PM CONNECTIONS Video monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT SCART-plug DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT S VIDEO INPUT V S INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT O VIDEO INPUT V S L V R No connection DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND COAXIAL FM ANT 75 UNBAL. PREPARATION OPTICAL (Europe model) D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L CENTER SURROUND L DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R O IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD S IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL V VIDEO S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT R L SUB WOOFER OUTPUT R L AUDIO INPUT TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner R S S S VIDEO OUTPUT V VCR AUDIO OUTPUT V S VIDEO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL OUTPUT L OUT VCR 1 BASIC OPERATION AUX DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 15 1/31/1, 4:21 PM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD mode. CONNECTIONS Connecting Speakers Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 ■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 3 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 2 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. ■ Main speaker terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. ■ Rear speaker terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ Center speaker terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 16 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Main speakers A Main speakers B Right INTRODUCTION Left Right Left (Europe model) R + – SPEAKERS – + L MAINS A MAIN PREPARATION B CENTER IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR REAR R (SURROUND) L + MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR – SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Subwoofer system Center speaker BASIC OPERATION Right Left Rear speakers ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Subwoofer connection When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. APPENDIX Notes • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL (5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. English 17 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 17 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (Europe model) Switch Speaker position IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MAINS Main IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER Impedance level Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Right Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) (Europe model) Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS U.K. model .......................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. MAINS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 :6 REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER To AC outlet SWITCHED 18 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 18 1/31/1, 4:21 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE Using the Test Tone The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should be performed at your listening position with the remote control. 3 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note PREPARATION • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 5 2,6 Before You Start Adjusting 2 1 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. 3 Turn up the volume. You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT 4 L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 3 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Turn the power on. VOLUME TEST LEFT STANDBY /ON 3 TEST CENTER Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A ON B OFF Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the center position. BASS – TREBLE + – + BALANCE L R TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR. Notes APPENDIX 4 TEST RIGHT ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. • If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU. English 19 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 19 1/31/1, 4:21 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE 4 Adjust BALANCE on the front panel so that the sound output level of the right main speaker and the left main speaker is the same. BALANCE L R Front panel 5 Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the speaker currently outputting the test tone so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops. Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40. y • Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME (u/d)). • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. 20 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 20 1/31/1, 4:21 PM BASIC OPERATION PLAYING A SOURCE 2 4 1,6 Select the desired input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on the video monitor for video sources.) The name of the selected input source appears on the display. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ INPUT EON INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START or INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E Front panel EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF Remote control MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO 3 6 AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION SILENT L VIDEO AUX 7 4 Input source 6 2 7 4 6CH INPUT or Front panel 1 Turn the power on. or • An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears. Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”. • If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT” appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source selected by using “6CH INPUT”. y Front panel Remote control • The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and Indications” on page 23 for details. SPEAKERS A ON B APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes STANDBY /ON 3 Remote control VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. Front panel 2 BASIC OPERATION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the display. OFF Front panel English 21 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 21 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE 5 Play the source. Refer to the instructions for the source component (and “TUNING” for details). Note • When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/ LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”. 6 ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the display. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME PCM or Front panel Remote control If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. • BASS controls the low-frequency response. • TREBLE controls the high-frequency response. • BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers. BASS – BALANCE TREBLE + + – L R Front panel 7 Use the digital sound field processor. Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”. K HZ 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 40 cannot be made (except the level of the subwoofer). ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled with the remote control. Play a video source, and then select an audio source with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the audio source with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM or Remote control Front panel ■ To mute the sound Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. Note • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this unit in the standby mode. 22 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 22 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE Input Modes and Indications When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. INPUT MODE or Front panel Remote control AUTO: ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. BASIC OPERATION Input mode PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the display. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with DTS: – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. English 23 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 23 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ On the front panel Selecting a DSP Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for details about each program. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE y TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT • Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25). MEMORY – + – + L R ON OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES ■ On the remote control S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PROGRAM 1 / Press PROGRAM l or h repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. 2 1 TUNING MODE Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. DIGITAL PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP 2 Press PRG+ or PRG– repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. DIGITAL DSP program name y • If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40 for details.) Notes MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP DSP program name • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. 24 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 24 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT or The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. Front panel Remote control Notes SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. BASIC OPERATION • If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back on the sound effect. PREPARATION Note • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA). INTRODUCTION Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) APPENDIX English 25 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 25 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 5 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Indoor FM antenna (included) Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. y TUNER AM ANT GND • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. FM ANT 75 UNBAL. Notes Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. terminal. • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Connecting a coaxial cable to the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) 2 1 Note 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cover • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 3 4 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 3 1 2 Lead wire Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 4 Clamp with pliers. Antenna stand 1 2 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 26 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 26 Unit: mm (inch) 1/31/1, 4:22 PM Snap the cover into place. TUNING Automatic Tuning Manual Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. VOLUME INPUT D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R INTRODUCTION 1 OPTICAL FM/AM SILENT or VIDEO AUX 1 Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 32 1 3 INPUT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. TUNING MODE Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. or EDIT 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Turn “ z ” off 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to the desired station. To continue the tuning search, hold down the button. PRESET/TUNING Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. PRESET /TUNING EDIT Turn “ z ” off APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a lower frequency and h once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. ADVANCED OPERATION If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. 4 BASIC OPERATION PRESET /TUNING FM/AM PREPARATION 4 PRESET/TUNING y English • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak). • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the station name is shown instead of the frequency on the display. 27 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 27 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS stations only) You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations). VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT ■ When automatic preset tuning is completed FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 3 21 1 You can select the preset number from which the unit will store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3), 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the preset number with which the first station will be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press FM/AM to select the FM band. Notes FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. MEMORY AUTO BASS EXT. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply using the manual preset tuning method. • Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all stations. • Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification) data along with the station.) Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again by using preset tuning methods. Flashes 28 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 28 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Manual Preset Tuning To Recall a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations) manually. RDS MODE/FREQ EON SURROUND PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT You can also recall a preset station with the remote control. Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press TUNER on the input selector. FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE VOLUME OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R D I G I T A L OPTICAL RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SILENT SURROUND STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS 4 3 2,5 2 BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. VIDEO AUX Tune in to the desired station. Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning procedure. 2 1 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The selected group appears on the display. 1 2 1 A/B/C/D/E Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group of preset stations. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Press l to select a lower preset station number and h to select a higher preset station number. PRESET/TUNING 5 Front panel 2 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET –/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the display along with the reception band, frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/TUNING or Front panel APPENDIX Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. The displayed station has been stored as the preset group and number you have selected, and the reception band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator lights up on the display. or Remote control AUTO STEREO MEMORY ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION Flashes TUNED AUTO STEREO MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 TUNED Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. English Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. 29 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 29 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5” VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2,4 1 Recall preset station “E1”. Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 2 Hold down (PRESET/ TUNING) EDIT for about 3 second. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. PRESET /TUNING EDIT BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again. The display shows the exchange of stations has been completed. PRESET /TUNING EDIT MEMORY 30 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 30 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. The program type on the RDS station being received is displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to “PTY SEEK Function” for details. ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display. RDS MODE/FREQ PS mode ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: PTY mode The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): ADVANCED OPERATION Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. Notes BASIC OPERATION ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the display. Press RDS MODE/ FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. PREPARATION Description of RDS Data Changing the RDS Mode INTRODUCTION Radio Data System (RDS) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the normal radio signal. RT mode Refer to “EON Function” on page 33. APPENDIX CT mode Frequency display mode English 31 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 31 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ■ To cancel this function PTY SEEK Function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. If you select the desired program type, the unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. 1 ■ Program types in the PTY mode There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. 3 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the display. NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORT EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED POP M ROCK M M.O.R. M LIGHT M CLASSICS OTHER M News Current affairs General information Sports Education Drama Culture Science Light entertainment Pops Rock Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) Light classics Serious classics Other music PTY SEEK MODE START Flashes 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the desired program type. The selected program type flashes on the display. PRESET/TUNING Flashes 3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while searching for stations. Light up PS PTY SEEK MODE START PTY PTY HOLD RT CT AUTO BASS EXT. The selected program type flashes. • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, the unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. 32 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 32 2/2/1, 5:35 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS 2 EON Function EON Lights up Note PS • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. AB EON PTY SEEK MODE START TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B Flashes PS 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING BASS EXT. A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY + CT SURROUND INPUT MODE – AUTO STEREO RT EON TUNED – + L R ON PTY AUTO STEREO RT CT EON NEWS PREPARATION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON BASS PTY NEWS • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. The program type name indicator flashes. 2 RDS MODE/FREQ BASS EXT. INTRODUCTION This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name indicator lights up on the display. TUNED TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. Lights up PS PTY RT TUNED PTY RT AUTO STEREO CT EON TUNED AB Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the display. AB ADVANCED OPERATION BASS EXT. PS BASS EXT. ■ To cancel this function AUTO STEREO CT EON • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. BASIC OPERATION 1 S VIDEO APPENDIX English 33 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 33 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECORDING A SOURCE Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for these components. 1,4 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 4 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 2 1 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Select the source you want to record. VOLUME Front panel INPUT or Front panel Remote control 3 Begin recording by the recording component connected to this unit. 4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. VOLUME or Front panel Remote control 34 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 34 1/31/1, 4:23 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. y 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the item (1 to 9) you want to adjust. INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. 1 SPEAKER SET CENTER SP MAIN SP PREPARATION REAR LR SP BASS OUT MAIN LVL 2 HP TONE CTRL 3 I/O ASSIGN 4 INPUT MODE 5 DOLBY D. SET y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing PRG–. Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to select a sub item. ADVANCED OPERATION LFE LEVEL Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the display. BASIC OPERATION 4 D-RANGE 6 DTS SET 7 SP DLY TIME 8 DISPLAY SET 9 MEM. GUARD Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 6 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly until the input source name appears to exit from the SET MENU. 1 APPENDIX 3,6 4,5 2 English Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 35 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 35 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR LR SP” are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). ■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. Note • When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG ■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NON for “REAR LR SP”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. 36 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 36 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU ■ BASS OUT (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) dB SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. Notes 3 I/O ASSIGN It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for terminals) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). ■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R ■ MAIN LVL (main level mode) Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB Initial setting: NORM ■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) ADVANCED OPERATION Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. BASIC OPERATION • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”, “MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. dB PREPARATION MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. INTRODUCTION Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL NORM (normal) Normally select this setting. APPENDIX –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. English 37 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 37 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU ■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Initial setting: (5) CD ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) MAX Output level Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power of this unit with the source component connected to more than one type of input jacks. • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO Dialog level Input level AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. MIN LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level Output level STD Dialog level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. ■ LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 38 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 38 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) You can adjust the brightness of the display. Control range : –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit. ms Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF PREPARATION Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms ■ DIMMER INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. 8 DISPLAY SET Center speaker image R C Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL Notes RR RL y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. BASIC OPERATION C L APPENDIX English 39 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 39 1/31/1, 4:23 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish. If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if it has already been adjusted in “ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure. Delay Time You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO 5CH STEREO GAME TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 2 36 10 69 23 13 13 20 16 16 20 15 15 20 15 15 20 5 5 20 5 5 Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because the center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all DSP programs. Speaker Center Right rear Left rear Subwoofer 40 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 40 2/2/1, 5:37 PM Preset value (dB) 0 0 0 0 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Adjusting Method Press – or + to adjust the delay time or speaker output levels. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of any other item. Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 1 Notes 3 2 2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item changes and appears on the display as below. DELAY Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR ADVANCED OPERATION CENTER Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/ subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time and output levels again. BASIC OPERATION Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. PREPARATION 1 • If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended. INTRODUCTION 3 Subwoofer output level Note • Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able to select all these items. APPENDIX English 41 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 41 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SLEEP TIMER The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control. Notes • First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit. • The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Canceling the SLEEP Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off. Note Setting the SLEEP Timer 1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired SLEEP time. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as below: 120 90 60 • The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) BASS EXT. SLEEP Flashes 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the display after the SLEEP timer has been set. The display returns to the previous indication. STEREO TUNED SLEEP Lights up 42 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 42 1/31/1, 4:23 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual. Component Selector Buttons TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder and tape deck can also be set.) VCR A VCR can be controlled. TV A TV can be controlled. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. Notes • The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. Turn on the power. 4 Press CD on the input selector. 5 Press CD on the component selector. 6 Press p. Refer to “Description of Each Mode” for the CD player operation buttons. 7 Adjust the volume. ■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD player 5 2 3 4 7 6 Make sure that the volume is set at the minimum level. 2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details. 43 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 43 1/31/1, 4:23 PM English 1 APPENDIX 3 ADVANCED OPERATION Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit BASIC OPERATION AMP(TUNER) You can perform the basic operations of this unit. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory set. DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory set. PREPARATION There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. INTRODUCTION It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Description of Each Mode ■ TAPE/MD MODE Note • TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV. Press TAPE/MD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT VOLUME MUTE SLEEP r REC/PAUSE This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck or MD recorder. p PLAY This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R. b DIR A (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. SKIP– (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the previous track. w REWIND (TAPE) This button rewinds a tape. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) DECK A/B (TAPE) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. e PAUSE (MD/CD-R) This button gives a pause in operation. a DIR B (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. SKIP+ (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the next track. s STOP This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. f FAST FORWARD (TAPE) This button winds a tape fast forward. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 44 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 44 1/31/1, 4:23 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ CD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. INTRODUCTION Press CD. PREPARATION POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT BASIC OPERATION EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) These buttons skip to the next or previous CD. VOLUME MUTE y TV VOLUME PAUSE/STOP function SLEEP p PLAY This button plays a CD. b SKIP– This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. w SEARCH This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. DISPLAY TV INPUT English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 45 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 45 1/31/1, 4:23 PM APPENDIX e PAUSE This button gives a pause in operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. a SKIP+ This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players. f SEARCH This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. ADVANCED OPERATION Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ DVD/LD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. Press DVD/LD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE SLEEP PAUSE SKIP – STOP TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT SKIP + PLAY SEARCH SEARCH ■ DVD MENU MODE Notes • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. Press DVD MENU. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU UP MENU LEFT MENU DOWN TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU TITLE • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 46 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 46 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ VCR MODE ■ CBL/SAT MODE Note Note • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. Press VCR. INTRODUCTION VCR POWER • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. CBL/SAT POWER Press CBL/SAT. CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. CBL/SAT CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU MENU DOWN BASIC OPERATION VCR REWIND TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV SLEEP MENU LEFT VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP +100 CHANNEL ENTER PREPARATION EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL RECALL ■ TV MODE Note • You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it. ADVANCED OPERATION TV POWER Press TV. CHANNEL TV CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP VCR STOP VCR REWIND TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE APPENDIX VCR REC Press this button twice. EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 47 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 47 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Setting the Manufacturer Code You can set the code for the manufacturer of your component after pressing the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 1 2 Turn on your component to be used. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be controlled. ■ To use a second (and third) VCR You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or DVD player is not being used. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD mode. 1 2 Turn on the VCR to be used. Press CBL/SAT or DVD MENU on the component selector. 3 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Notes • You can set only one code for one mode. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes: Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 48 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each mode Returning to the Factory Setting Press one of the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. PREPARATION 1 1 INTRODUCTION ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all modes BASIC OPERATION The following codes are factory set. Component Code TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD TV Cable TV VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component Set code ADVANCED OPERATION Component selector button We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. APPENDIX English 49 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 49 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. Note • Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features 1 CONCERT HALL — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a highenergy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features 4 ENTERTAINMENT 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 50 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 50 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE Input source Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm ADVENTURE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL ADVENTURE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. GENERAL q/DTS SURROUND NORMAL DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital NORMAL (5.1-channel) ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ENHANCED DTS The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. APPENDIX DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital ENHANCED (5.1-channel) This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. ADVANCED OPERATION 9 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel BASIC OPERATION DTS ADVENTURE DTS PREPARATION 8 70 mm SCI-FI This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). INTRODUCTION 70 mm SPECTACLE Features Notes 51 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 51 1/31/1, 4:24 PM English • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Presence DSP sound field main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE Surround DSP 70 mm GENERAL sound field The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater Presence DSP sound field without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI DGTL ADVENTURE Left surround DSP Right surround DSP DTS ADVENTURE sound field sound field DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. 52 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 52 1/31/1, 4:24 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem No sound and/or no picture. Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The protection circuit has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 22 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. 22 14, 15 21 16, 17 — Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 18 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 42 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 22 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 12 – 17 APPENDIX The output and input for the video are connected to different types of video jacks. ADVANCED OPERATION The picture does not appear. BASIC OPERATION Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. PREPARATION The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English 53 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 53 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on. 25 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 50, 51 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. 22 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 40 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 36 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. A “humming” sound can be heard. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 37 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 37 40 50, 51 — 37 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 36, 37 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 54 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 50, 51 — The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. Refer to page 54 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Turn on the power to the component. Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The settings of the SET MENU and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 39 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — — 12 – 15 INTRODUCTION 34 It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. PREPARATION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 55 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 55 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. FM stereo reception is noisy. There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. There is multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing AM noises. Remedy Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. Refer to page 26 27 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 26 The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 28 The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 26 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. 7 The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Press one of the component selector buttons, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 43 The remote control cannot control system components. — The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. Enter the code again. Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. — After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 56 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 56 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 70 W 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ......................................................... 85 W • Video Signal Type .......................................................................... PAL • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 105 W • IEC Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • S-Video Signal Level Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms ......................................................... 95/115/135/155 W FM SECTION • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) ................................... 70 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 35 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m • Channel Separation CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz) ...................................... 60 dB or more (10 kHz) .................................... 45 dB or more GENERAL • Phones Output (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................. 490 mV/390 ohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Power Supply ............................................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................................... 250 W Standby Mode ......................................................................... 0.96 W • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ............................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ..................... 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide ADVANCED OPERATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Tuning Range .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz BASIC OPERATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz PREPARATION • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX English 57 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 57 1/31/1, 4:24 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). 58 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 58 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 1/31/1, 4:24 PM GLOSSARY ■ S VIDEO signal INTRODUCTION With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) PREPARATION Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits BASIC OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) APPENDIX Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s digital input/ output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. English 59 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 59 1/31/1, 4:24 PM INDEX A M AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18 Antennas ........................................................................................ 26 B Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 48, i Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 36, 41 MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 39 Muting ........................................................................................... 22 BALANCE .................................................................................... 22 BGV function ................................................................................ 22 P C CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 47 CD mode ........................................................................................ 45 CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 50, 58 Connections Antennas ................................................................................. 26 Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and CD player) .............................................................................. 12 External decoder ..................................................................... 12 Power supply cords ................................................................ 18 Speakers ................................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14 D Delay time ..................................................................................... 40 Display ............................................................................................. 8 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) DIMMER ............................................................................... 39 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .............................................................................. 38 LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 38 Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 58 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 58 DSP program CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 50 Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 50 DTS ............................................................................................... 58 DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 38 Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12 DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 46 DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 46 E External decoder ............................................................................ 12 F Front panel ....................................................................................... 4 H HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 37 I IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 38 Input modes ................................................................................... 23 I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 37, 59 L LFE .................................................................................... 38, 39, 58 Package contents ............................................................................. 3 PCM ............................................................................................... 59 Playing ........................................................................................... 21 Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18 Preset stations Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30 Tuning in to a preset station ................................................... 29 Presetting tuning Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28 Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29 R RDS stations EON function ......................................................................... 33 PTY SEEK function ............................................................... 32 RDS mode .............................................................................. 31 Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9 Recording ...................................................................................... 34 Remote control Basic operation ......................................................................... 6 Batteries .................................................................................... 3 Operation range ........................................................................ 7 Setup codes ............................................................................. 48 S Sampling frequency ................................................................. 22, 59 SET MENU ................................................................................... 35 SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 58 Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 42 SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 39 Speaker Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19 Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 40 Placement ............................................................................... 10 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) BASS OUT ............................................................................. 37 CENTER SP ........................................................................... 36 MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 37 MAIN SP ................................................................................ 36 REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 36 Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17 S VIDEO ....................................................................................... 59 T TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 44 Test tone ........................................................................................ 19 Tuning Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27 Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27 TV mode ........................................................................................ 47 V VCR mode ..................................................................................... 47 Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 58 60 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 60 1/31/1, 4:24 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT Clarivox 0821, 0961, 1971 Clatronic 1181, 1331 Concerto 0791 Condor 0761 Contec 0151, 1171 Continental Edison 0571, 0651, 0901 Craig 1171 Crosley 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 Crown 2541 Ctc Clatronic 0261 CXC 1171 Daewoo 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 Dansai 0101 Decca 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 Decca (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 Degraaf 0451, 1351 Dixi 0991, 1511 Domeos 0101 Doric 1031 Dual 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 Dual-Tec 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 Dumont 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 Dynatron 0101 Elbe 1551, 1971, 2031 Electro Tech 1511 Elektronska 0771 Elman 0261, 1621 Elta 1511 Emerson 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 Erres 0101 Etron 1981 Europhon 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 Fenner 0101, 1511 Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 Fidelity 0451, 0761, 2281 Fidelity (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 Filmnet 1141 Finlandia 0451, 2321 Finlux 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV Admiral 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 Aiko 0891 Akai 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 Akura 1331 Alba 1241, 1331, 2361 Albiral 1971 Amstrad 1301, 1511 Anam 1171 Arc En Ciel 0571 Arcam 0571, 0761 Aristona 0751 Arthur Martin 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 Astra 1511 Atantic 0761 Atlantic 0761 Atori 1511 Audiosonic 1181, 1321, 1511 Ausind 0491, 1411 Autovox 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 Baird 1101, 1351 Bang & Olufsen 1081 Basic Line 1321, 1331 Bauer 1451 Baur 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 Beko 2491, 2501 Blaupunkt 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 Brandt 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 Brionvega 1021, 1051, 1081 Britannia 0761 Bruns 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 Bush 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 Bush (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 Candle 0791 Century 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 Citizen 0791 First Line Fisher 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 Forgestone 2281 Formenti 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 Formenti-phoenix 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 Fortress 1081 Frontech 0451, 1181, 1981 Fujitsu 1261 Funai 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 Futuretech 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 Geloso 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 General Technic 2681 Genexxa 0451, 1331 GoldStar 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 Goodmans 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 Gorenje 0981, 1061 Graetz 0451 Granada 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 Granada (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 Grundig 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 Hanseatic 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 Hantarex 0581 Hemmermann 0061 Hifivox 0331, 0571 Hinari 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 Hitachi Hyper Imperial Ingersol Inno Hit Innovation Interfunk Irradio Isukai ITT ITT-nokia JVC (Victor) Kaisui Kamosonic Karcher Kawasho Kendo Kennedy 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 1511 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 1331 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 0591, 1321, 1331 0601 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 0761 0261 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 i 08V520RDS-code(GB) 1 2/2/1, 5:44 PM NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 Neckermann 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 Nediator 0101 Nicamagic 0761 Nikkai 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 Nobliko 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 Nogamatic 0571 Nokia 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 Nordmende 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 Oceanic 0321, 1651, 1981 Oceanic (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 Onceas 0601 Onwa 1171 Orion 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 Osaka 2011 Osaki 1101, 1331, 2011 Osume 0151 Otto Versand 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 Pael 0591, 1411 Panasonic 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 Panoramic 2351 Pathe Marconi 0571 Pathe’ Cinema (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 Pausa 1511 Pauza 1511 Perdio 0891, 1101 Philco 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 Philips 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 Phoenix 1081 Phonola 0751, 1081 Pioneer 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 Prandoni-prince 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 Konka Korting 2701 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 KTV 0601, 1171 Lenoir 0601, 1511 Leyeo 1181 Lifetec 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 Loewe Opta 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 Logic 1691, 2281 Logik 0551, 1681, 2281 Lowewe 0831 Luma 0351, 0451, 1901 Luxman 0791 Luxman Stereo Tuner 0791 Luxor 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 Lyco 1181 Magnadyne 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 Magnafon 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 Manesth 0101 Marantz 0101 Marelli 1081 Mark 0101 Matsui 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 Maximal 0071, 1981 McMichael 1281 Medion 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 Memorex 1511 Metz 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 Micromaxx 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 Minerva 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 Mistral 2281 Mitsubishi 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 Mivar 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 Multitech 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 Murphy 0451, 2091 Murphy (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 Prandoni-promce 0451, 0491, 0581 Prima Profex Protech Quelle 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 Radiomarelli 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 Radionette 0031, 2051, 2091 Radiola 2291 Rank 0481, 2151 Rbm 2131, 2151 Rbm (UK) 0481 Rediffusion 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 Rediffusion (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 Rex 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 Rft 0991, 2511 Roadstar 1321, 1511 Rotel 0151 Saba 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 Saccs 1971 Saisho 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 Salora 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 Sambers 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 Samsung 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 Sanyo 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 Schaub Lorenz 0451 Schneider 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 Scott 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 ii 08V520RDS-code(GB) 2 2/2/1, 5:44 PM Seleco Sentra Sharp Siarem Sicatel Siemens Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonoko Sony Soundesign SSS Stern Sunkai Supra Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tcm Technics Techwood Teknika Tele Teleavia Telefunken Teletech Tempest Tensai Texet Thomson Thorn 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 1601 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 1971 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 1181 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 0101, 0021, 0061, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 0451 0451, 1641, 2011 1181, 1511, 0101 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 1171 1171 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 0691 0791 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 0451, 0191, 1331, 1531 0141 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 1311 0791 1171, 1231, 1261 1141 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 1511 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 1331, 2091 0601 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 Thorn-Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 Toshiba 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 Trans Continens 0451 Tristar 2281 Triumph 0481, 0581, 2121 Uher 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 Ultravox 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 Universum 1181, 2051 Univox 1971 Vegavox 0811 Vexa 0101, 1511 Videoton 2481 Vortec 0101, 0651 Voxson 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 Waltham 0451 Watson 0431, 2201, 2241 Watt Radio 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 Wega 0141, 1081, 1981 Wega Color 1021 Weltblick 0101 Weston 1621 White Westinghouse 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 Yoko 0601, 1511 Zanussi 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 Zoppas 0451 SATELLITE TUNER Akai Alba Amstrad 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 Ankaro 0476 Ast 0406 Astra 0126 Barcom 0476 Blaupunkt 0966 Bmc Satellite 0106 British Telecom 1276 Bush 0826 Bush (UK) 0956 Cambridge 0196, 1276 Chaparral 0016, 0696, 1006 Columbus 0616 Connexions 0306, 0426 Discus Elipse 0856, 0866 Diskxpress 0426, 0476 Drake 1516 Echostar 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 Elta 1286 Elta Sat 0146 Eurodec 1226, 1236, 1246 Ferguson 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 Finlux 0976 Fracarro 0026, 0536, 0776 Fuba 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 Giucar Record 0206, 0336 Grundig 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 High Performance 0916 Hirschmann 0756, 0966 Hitachi 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 Icx International 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 Jeemon 0146 Jerrold 0846, 0986 Johansson 0246 JVC (Victor) 1276 Kathrein 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 Kosmos 0266 Kyostar 1036, 1086 Leng 0246 Lifesat 1326, 1346, 1356 Luxor 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 Macab 0356 Maspro 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 Medion 1326, 1346 Metz 0966 Micromaxx 1326, 1346 Mitsubishi 0966 Morgans 0596 Muratto 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 Network 0046 CABLE Cabletime 1446, 1456, 1476 Clyde Cablevision 1426 Filmnet 1396, 1436 France Telecom 1386 GEC 1426 Jerrold 1416 Movie Time 1466 NSC 1466 Philips 1386 Pioneer 0006 Samsung 1496 Scientific Atlanta 1486, 1506 Starcom 1416 STS 1466 Tele 1436 Tele+1 1436 Teleservice 1406, 1476 Tudi 1376 United Cable 1416 Zenith 1406 Nikko Nokia 1136, 1146 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 Norsat 0786 Otto Versand 0966 Pace 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306 Pace Mss 0946 Palcom 0616, 0686, 0706 Palsat 0396 Paltec 0706 Panasonic 0806, 1306 Pansat 1076 Philips 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 Prosat 1176 Ptt Telecom 0306, 0896 Quelle 0966 Radix 1056 Rediffusion 0316, 0786 Rft 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 Sagem 1256 Sakura 0566, 0816 Salora 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 Samsung 0746, 0756 Sat 0406 Satcom 0896 Sateco 0646 Sector 1266 Sedea 1096 Sentra 0416 Siemens 0896, 0966 Sintrack 0906 Skylab 0476 Skyscan 0876 Sony 0736, 0946 Stella 0306 Strong 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 Stv 0636 Tandberg 1116, 1366 Tandy 0916 Tantec 0616 Tatung 0516, 0546 Technisat 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 Telecom 0306 Telemax 0586 Thorn-Ferguson 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 Toshiba 0946 Triad 0406 Uniden 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US Electronics 0886 Vortec 0756, 1036, 1076 Vtech 0436 Winersat 0246 Wisi 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 Wolsey 0916 Zehnder 0266, 0406 Zender 0406 VCR Aiwa Akai 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 Alba 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 Amstrad 0322, 0432, 0452 Anitech 0002 Anitsch 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 Audiosonic 0002 Baird 0042, 0282, 0492 Bang & Olufsen 0042 Baur 0052, 0062, 0812 Blaupunkt 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 Brionvega 0032 Bush 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 Bush (UK) 0812 Capehart 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 Craig 0072, 0482 Crown 0112, 0282, 1212 Daewoo 0112, 0282, 1212 Dansai 0012 Daytron 0112 Decca 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 Decca (UK) 0052 Degraaf 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 Dixi 0442 Dual 0042, 0632 Dumont 0052, 0432, 0532 Dynatech 0432 Dynatron 0012 Elbe 0122 Elin 0072 Emerson 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 Erres 0012 Ferguson 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 Fidelity 0432 Finlandia 0052, 0532 Finlux 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 First Line 0002, 0912 Fisher 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 Formenti-Phoenix 0012, 0052 Frontech 0112 Funai 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 Geloso 0002 General Technic 1172 GoldStar 0012, 0812, 0952, 1202 Goodmans 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 Goodmans (UK) 0002 Graetz 0022, 0042 Granada 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 Granada (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 iii 08V520RDS-code(GB) 3 2/2/1, 5:44 PM Nordmende 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 Olympus 0462 Optonica 0132, 0502 Orion 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 Osaka 0432 Osaki 0002, 0012, 0432 Otto Versand 0052, 0062, 0812 Panasonic 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 Pentax 0172, 0602 Perdio 0432 Philco 1062 Philips 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0472, 0502, 1072 Phonola 0052, 0152 Pilot 0012 Pioneer 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 Portland 0112 Proline 0432 Pye 0052, 0152 Quartz 0572 Quelle 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0552, 0942 Radionette 0022 Realistic 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 Ret 1072 Rex 0042, 0742, 0782 Ricoh 0952 Saba 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 Saisho 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 Salora 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 Samsung 0052, 0072, 0652, 1192, 1212 Sansui 0042, 0142 Sanyo 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 Schaub Lorenz 0022, 0042 Schneider 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 Sei-Sinudyne 0442 Seleco 0042 Sentra 0112 Sharp 0132, 0502, 0702 Shintom 0002 Siemens 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 Sinudyne 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 Sonoko 0282 Sony 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 Grundig 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 Hanseatic 0052, 0812 Harman/Kardon 0922, 1202 Hcm 0002 Hinari 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 Hitachi 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 Imperial 0072, 0432 Ingersol 0442 Inno Hit 0002, 0052, 0072 Innovation 1142, 1162, 1172 Interfunk 0022, 0052 Irradio 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 Jensen 0042 JVC (Victor) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 Karcher 0052, 0072, 0812 Kendo 0492 Kenwood 0042, 0142, 0572 Lifetec 1142, 1162, 1172 Lloyd 0432 Loewe Opta 0052, 0092, 0152 Logik 0002, 0072, 0442 Luma 0162 Luxor 0492, 0572, 0812 M Electronic 0432 Magnadyne 0052 Magnasonic 0572 Manesth 0012 Marantz 0012, 0052, 0092, 0502, 1202 Mark 0012 Marta 0012 Matsui 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 Medion 1142, 1162, 1172 Memorex 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 Metz 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 Micromaxx 1142, 1162, 1172 Minerva 0062, 0092, 0252 Minolta 0172, 0602 Mitsubishi 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 Multitech 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 Murphy 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 National 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142, 1202 Neckermann 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 Nikkai 0112 Nobliko 0092 Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 STS Sunkai Sunstar Sylvania Symphonic Tandegerg 0602 0512 0432 0432, 0912 0432, 0912 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 Tashiko 0132, 0432 Tatung 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 Teac 0042, 0432 Technics 0462 Teknika 0012, 0432 Telefunken 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 Tempest 1032, 1042, 1052 Tenosal 0002 Thomson 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 Thorn 0042, 0902 Thorn-Ferguson 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 Tonsai 0002 Toshiba 0042, 0622, 0912, 1212 Totevision 0012, 0072 Triumph 0922 Uher 0042, 0072 Ulravox 0032 Unitech 0072 Vector Research 0122 Videon 1162, 1172 Weltblick 0012 White Westinghouse 0032 Xenon 0162 Yamaha 0042, 1202 Yoko 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER Akai Denon Hitachi JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 0108 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0067, 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 iv 08V520RDS-code(GB) 4 2/2/1, 7:24 PM LD PLAYER Aiwa Funai Hitachi Magnavox Panasonic Pioneer Realistic Samsung Sony Victor Yamaha 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER Accuphase Adc Adcom Akai 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 Arcam 1875 Arcam-Rotel 0165 Audio-Technica 0835 Audiosonic 0155 Awia 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 California Audio Lab 1075 Carrera 0555, 0875 Carver 0825, 1415 Cyrus-Rotel 0205 Denon 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 Dual 1005 Elin 0185 Emerson 1015, 1285, 1675 Fisher 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 Genexxa 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GoldStar 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 Grundig 0175 Harman Kardon 0495, 0565, 0325, 1135, 1145, 1155 Hitachi 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 Innovation 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-Nokia 0185 JVC (Victor) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 Karcher 0485 Kenwood 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 Korting 0175 Lifetec 2015 Light Control 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 Linn 0165, 1875 Luxman 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 Luxor 0185, 1895, 1905 Magnavox 1865, 1875 Marantz Matsushita MCS Medion Memorex MGA Micromaxx Mission Mitsubishi NAD Nakamichi NEC Neckerman Nikko Oceanic Okano Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proton Quasar Radiola Radiotone Realistic Rotel Saba SAE Salora Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Sherwood Siemens Signature Sony Sytvania Tandberg Tashiko TCM Teac Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Thomson Toshiba Vector Research 0555, 0865 Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 1095, 1605 0535 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 1125 2015 0165, 1875 1125, 1205 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0135, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 0635, 0645, 1565 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 0155, 0225 0835, 1165 0185 0155, 0225 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 0905, 1875 1075 1845, 1855 0485 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 1875 1005 1875 0185 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 1845, 1855 1285, 1675 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 1275, 1445 1085 1155 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 1875 1885 1525 1985, 2015 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 1005 1865 1005 0755, 0765 CD-RECORDER/CD-RW Hitachi JVC (Victor) Marantz Philips Pioneer Yamaha 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER Kenwood Pioneer Sharp Sony Yamaha 0214 0254 0264 0224 0024, 0224, 0234 TAPE DECK Akai Denon Grundig Harman JVC (Victor) Kenwood Korting Luxman Marantz NAD Onkyo Philips Pioneer Sony Yamaha 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 v 08V520RDS-code(GB) 5 2/2/1, 5:44 PM GB HTR-5450RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-HTR5450RDS-cv1/4 1 HTR-5450RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V735940 2/1/1, 4:42 PM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player OPTICAL AUDIO OUT L S VIDEO OUT Main speakers B VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O L R L VIDEO OUT R V S DIGITAL INPUT CD R TUNER AM ANT GND SPEAKERS + — + — L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R L — R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 S V * RX-V520/RX-V520RDS *HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only (U.S.A. model) * VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S DIGITAL OUTPUT R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML) Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP(TUNER) Input selector buttons Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET–/+ EFFECT EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP SLEEP TV INPUT PRG+, PRG– REC/PAUSE PLAY DIR A (TAPE) SKIP– (MD) SET MENU REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) –/+ TIME/LEVEL POWER Input selector buttons Input selector buttons MUTE DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER A/B/C/D/E TEST CD VOLUME TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP+ (MD) VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE PLAY SKIP– SKIP+ SEARCH FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) STOP SEARCH STOP MUTE SLEEP PLAY SKIP– SEARCH TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE SKIP+ SEARCH STOP V728130 V520(Q)_Quick 1 2/1/1, 1:37 PM Quick Reference Card VCR DVD MENU VCR POWER POWER Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU SELECT MENU LEFT TITLE CBL/SAT TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU UP CBL/SAT POWER MENU DOWN CHANNEL MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR REWIND TV SLEEP 2 DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU UP MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR STOP CHANNEL TV CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE MENU RIGHT VCR FAST FORWARD *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. V520(Q)_Quick TV VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE +100 CHANNEL ENTER CBL/SAT CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV VOLUME MENU RIGHT MENU TV POWER CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MENU RECALL VCR REWIND MENU DOWN Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. 2/1/1, 1:38 PM VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP V728130